Students should note that all of the modules below may not be available to them.

Undergraduate students should refer to the relevant section of the UCC Undergraduate Calendar for their programme requirements.

Postgraduate students should refer to the relevant section of the UCC Postgraduate Calendar for their programme requirements.

EC1107 Reading Economists
EC1108 Communicating Economic Reasoning
EC1109 Transition to Professional Life I
EC1111 Economic Data Collection
EC1112 Economic Data As Evidence
EC1113 The World of Economics - Co-operation in the Economic System
EC1114 The World of Economics - Public Policy in the Economic System
EC1115 The World of Economics: Coordination and Individual Decision Making
EC1117 Markets and Governments An Introduction to Economics
EC1118 Markets and Governments An Introduction to Economics
EC1121 Markets, Governments and the Economics of Social Issues
EC1122 Markets, Governments and the Economics of Social Issues
EC1131 Economic Decision Making
EC1132 Economics, the Markets and Public Policy
EC1200 Quantitative Techniques for Economics 1
EC1202 Business Economics 1
EC1203 Business Economics 2
EC1207 Principles of the Micro Economy
EC1208 Principles of the Macro Economy
EC1209 Understanding and Interpreting Data
EC1210 Skills for Analysing Economic Data
EC1211 Quantitative Techniques for Economics 2
EC1212 Economics of Business 1
EC1213 Principles of Economic Analysis 1
EC1214 Principles of Economic Analysis 2
EC1500 Economic Analysis for Food Business Part 1
EC1503 Economic Analysis for Food Business Part 2
EC2006 Transition to Professional Life II
EC2009 The Changing Economy: Recessions and Booms
EC2010 The Changing Economy: Money and Monetary Policy
EC2011 The Changing Economy: Government Spending and Tax
EC2012 Economic Modelling of Decision Makers
EC2013 Empirical Research Methods
EC2014 Reasoning and Problem Solving in Economics
EC2015 Research in Economics
EC2016 Economic Journey Through life Decisions: Economic Information and Uncertainty
EC2017 Economic Journey Through life Decisions: Firms in a World of Uncertainty
EC2018 Economics Journey Through Life's Decisions: Behavioural Economics
EC2100 Microeconomics: Behaviour and Organisations
EC2110 Microeconomics: Organisations and Institutions
EC2111 Macroeconomics: Growth and Development
EC2112 Macroeconomics: Business Cycles
EC2113 Economic Data and Skills for Data Collection
EC2114 Skills for Interpretation of Economic Data
EC2115 Introduction to Mathemathical Economic Analysis
EC2116 Introduction to Statistical Economic Analysis
EC2117 Reasoning and Critical Thinking in Economics
EC2118 Reflection and Persuasion in Economics
EC2151 Economics of Social Policy 1
EC2200 Economics of Managerial Decision Making
EC2204 Business Microeconomics 1
EC2205 Business Microeconomics 2
EC2206 Business Econometrics and Forecasting
EC2208 Resourcing Organisation and Competitive Capability 1
EC2209 Resourcing Organisation and Competitive Capability 2
EC2211 Economics - Production and Costs
EC2212 Business Cycles and Macroeconomic Policy Debates
EC2213 Growth and Development in the Global Economy
EC2214 The Macroeconomic Environment in the Short term
EC2215 The Macroeconomic Environment in the Long term
EC2219 Microeconomics and the Individual
EC2220 Microeconomics and Macroeconomic outcomes
EC2900 Economics of Public Policy
EC2905 Economics of Markets and Government
EC3003 Survey Methods Part 1
EC3004 Survey Methods Part 2
EC3100 The Economics of Corporate Strategy I
EC3109 The Economics of Corporate Strategy II
EC3119 Capital Markets and Asset Valuation
EC3120 Portfolio Theory and Asset Management
EC3127 Economics and the Labour Market
EC3128 Human Resource Economics
EC3129 Health Economics: The Role of the Market
EC3130 Honours Dissertation
EC3134 Transition for Professional Life III
EC3135 Health Economics: The role of Public Policy
EC3136 Firms and Innovation
EC3137 The Economics of Creativity
EC3138 The Role of Place for Innovation
EC3139 The Wealth and Poverty of Nations: International Cooperation
EC3140 The Wealth and Poverty of Nations: Economic Growth and Development
EC3141 The Wealth and Poverty of Nations: Financial Institutions and Markets
EC3142 Methods for Economic Investigation: Survey Design and Implementation
EC3143 Research Methods for Economic Investigation: Empirical Econometrics
EC3144 Honours Dissertation
EC3145 Public Expenditure: How the Government Spends Taxpayer's Money
EC3146 Public Finance: Where the Government Gets its Revenue
EC3147 Economic Growth and Competitiveness
EC3148 Economic Growth and Innovation
EC3149 Economics Principles of Insurance I: Theory and Concepts
EC3150 Economics Principles of Insurance II: Applications to Health Insurance
EC3151 Economics of Social Policy 2
EC3152 Quantitative Methods: Econometrics 1
EC3153 Quantitative Methods: Econometrics 2
EC3154 Survey Methods: Questionnaire Design
EC3155 Survey Methods: Quantitative Analysis
EC3205 Economics of Information
EC3208 Economic Consulting
EC3209 Time Series Analysis
EC3210 Principles of Insurance for Finance
EC3211 Advanced Data Analysis for Finance
EC3213 Money, Credit and Banking
EC3214 International Finance
EC3215 Economics of Corporate Strategy
EC3216 Economics of Strategic Behaviour
EC3217 Finance and Capital Markets
EC3218 Portfolio Analysis
EC3222 Transferable Skills - Economics - Work Placement
EC3223 Transferable Skills - Economics - Research Project
EC3409 Strategic Interaction and Decision Making
EC3900 The Market for Labour
EC3907 Market Economy 3
EC3908 Market Economy 4
EC3909 The Business Organisation
EC3911 Economics Reading Workshops 1
EC3912 Economics Reading Workshops 2
EC3913 Business Cycles and Development
EC3914 Market Economy and Government
EC3915 Economic Research
EC3916 Survey Design and Sampling
EC3917 Individual Economic Decision-Making
EC3918 Organisational Economic Decision-Making
EC4000 Economic Foundations 1
EC4001 Economic Foundations 2
EC4171 Economic Integration in Europe
EC4206 Incentives in Firms
EC4207 Firm Organisation and Behaviour
EC4209 Government and the Macroeconomy
EC4210 Government and Business
EC4211 Economics of the Labour Market
EC4212 Economics of Human Resources
EC4213 Law and Economics of EU Competition Policy
EC4214 Law and Economics of Competition & Regulation
EC4215 Business Econometrics 1
EC4216 Business Econometrics 2
EC4217 International Financial Economics
EC4218 Macro Finance in a Globalised Economy
EC4219 Economics of Corporate Strategy
EC4220 Economics of Strategic Behaviour
EC4224 Innovation and Technology
EC4225 Economics of Strategy
EC4301 Economics of Health Organisations
EC4302 Health Economics
EC4402 Economic Research Project
EC4403 Economic Consulting
EC4904 Market Economy 5
EC4905 Market Economy 6
EC4906 Growth and Development in the Global Economy
EC4907 Productivity and Competitiveness in the Global Economy
EC4908 Economic Survey Data Analysis
EC4909 Economics in Practice Showcase Business Event
EC5200 Principles for Economic Reasoning 1
EC5202 Principles for Economic Reasoning 2
EC5203 Economic Ways of Knowing 2
EC5204 Styles of Knowing 1
EC5205 Styles of Knowing 2
EC5206 Economic Ways of Knowing 1
EC5207 The Economic System: Complexity and Change 1
EC5208 The Economic System: Complexity and Change 2
EC5209 Foundations for Business Practices 1
EC5210 Foundations for Business Practices 2
EC5213 Immersion Experiences 1
EC5214 Immersion Experiences 2
EC6001 Macroeconomics for Financial Markets
EC6002 Financial Institutions and Money Markets
EC6003 International Finance
EC6004 Regulation and Compliance in Capital Markets
EC6005 Derivatives Securities
EC6006 Treasury Risk Management
EC6009 Research Methods
EC6010 Dissertation in Financial Economics
EC6013 Health Services Resourcing - Public Funding Mechanisms
EC6014 Health Services Resourcing - Private Funding Mechanisms
EC6015 Evaluating Health Outcomes 1
EC6016 Evaluating Health Outcomes 2
EC6017 Health Care Markets 1
EC6018 Health Care Markets Part 2
EC6019 Research Skills and Methods for Health Economics 1
EC6020 Dissertation in Health Economics
EC6027 Research Skills and Methods for Health Economics 2
EC6028 Economic Decision Making in Health 1
EC6029 Economic Decision Making in Health Part 2
EC6030 Health Economics in Practice
EC6034 Innovation in Health Practice
EC6037 Health Care Economic Evaluation 1
EC6038 Health Care Economic Evaluation 2
EC6039 Applied Health Survey Methods 1
EC6040 Applied Health Survey Methods 2
EC6041 Applied Health Econometrics 1
EC6042 Applied Health Econometrics 2
EC6043 Quantitative Techniques and Analysis Part 1
EC6044 Quantitative Techniques and Analysis Part 2
EC6045 Asset Pricing
EC6046 Fund Management and Evaluation
EC6047 Fixed Income Securities
EC6048 Securities Valuation and Selection
EC6050 Business Development and the Competitive Environment
EC6051 Growth and Change
EC6052 Innovation and Creativity
EC6053 Research Methods
EC6054 Econometrics for Research
EC6057 Dissertation in Economics
EC6058 Career Development Workshop
EC6059 Economic Data Analysis for Research
EC6061 Scenario Analysis for Creative Thinking
EC6062 Applied Econometrics
EC6063 Applied Time Series Analysis
EC6064 Health Systems: Stakeholders and Interactions
EC6065 Current Issues in the Business of Health: Research Methods
EC6066 The Business of Health Care 1
EC6067 The Business of Health Care 2
EC6100 Industry, Market and Strategic Analysis Part 1
EC6101 Industry, Market and Strategic Analysis Part 2
EC6102 Economic Survey Techniques for Business Research Part 1
EC6103 Economic Survey Techniques for Business Research Part 2
EC6104 Practice Laboratory in Business Part 1
EC6105 Practice Laboratory in Business Part 2
EC6106 Resourcing for Entrepreneurship and Innovation Part 1
EC6107 Resourcing for Entrepreneurship and Innovation Part 2
EC6114 Field Work in Business Economics
EC6116 The Market Economy and Enterpreneuship
EC6117 Reflective Journaling
EC6120 Business Practice and Live Case Analysis
EC6301 The Third Sector Economy
EC6504 Economic Foundations for Strategic Thinking
EC6600 Econometrics: Theory and Applications 1
EC6601 Econometrics: Theory and Applications 2
EC6602 Contemporary Economic Debates and Ideas
EC6603 Current Research Seminars
EC6604 Advanced Microeconomics 1
EC6605 Advanced Microeconomics 2
EC6606 Advanced Macroeconomics 1
EC6607 Advanced Macroeconomics 2
EC6617 Professional Business Skills
EC6618 Business Economics Report (the BER)
EC6619 Scenario Planning for Strategic Decision-Making
EC6620 Research Methods for Business Economics
EC6621 Economics of Business Strategy
EC6622 Business Relationships and Business Strategy
EC6623 Analysing General Business Conditions
EC6624 Macroeconomic Data Analysis for Strategic Decision-Making
EC6625 Financial Economics and Business Strategy
EC6626 Corporate Treasury Management
EC6627 Fieldwork Methods for Business
EC6628 Analysis of Business Survey Data
EC6665 Quantitative Techniques for Economic Research
EC6666 Research Methods and Professional Development
EC6667 Dissertation in Economics
EC7003 Research Design and Methods for Practitioner Researchers
EC7004 Research Analysis and Evaluation
EC7005 Research Presentation, Analysis and Evaluation for Practitioner Researchers
EC7006 Developmental Approaches for Practitioner-Researchers
EC7007 Research Design and Methods in Business Economics

EC1107 Reading Economists

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Reflective Practice, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To foster participants's development through an exploration of the writings of Economists.

Module Content: Participants will explore the writings of economists to answer the following questions: What questions do they address? How do they use the economic way of thinking? How do they use data as evidence? What argument are they making? Why do economists arrive at different conclusions? Why and what do economists debate? Why have economists got different perspectives?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify questions as part of their reading experience
· Demonstrate the relevance of context on the writer and his/her work
· Outline how the writer uses the economic way of thinking to formulate their arguments
· Identify and explain the evidence that they use to support their argument
· Identify and comprehend the different perspectives on the same issue
· Discuss the reasons behind these different perspectives
· Demonstrate how their reading has affected their views and perspectives.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x project (3,000 words) 60 marks, Reflective Journal 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC1108 Communicating Economic Reasoning

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To foster participant's development through critical reasoning skills and written communication skills

Module Content: Through a series of interactive workshops and performances participants address the following questions: How is an argument constructed? How do we critique and evaluate the arguments of others and in the popular press? How do we communicate and present our arguments and analysis to a business/academic audience and the general public? Participants use economic theories and concepts and data analysis to formulate their own and critique others' arguments.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and uncover their own perspective on different issues.
· Identify opposing arguments on current issues in Economics.
· Analyse these arguments using the skills of argumentation and language analysis
· Prepare judgements on the merits of economic arguments in the news and media
· Evaluate their own perspective on particular issues
· Present their own argument on a particular issue and debate with other participants
· Communicate judgements on the merits of economic arguments
· Communicate their arguments to different audiences.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x multi-media project, 50 marks, 1 x Newspaper article 30 marks, 1 x 1,000 report 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC1109 Transition to Professional Life I

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 48hr(s) Seminars (Workshops, Coaching); 200hr(s) Directed Study (Project Work, Reflective Practice).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To grow the perspective and mindset of participants through the development of (i) workplace competencies and (ii) self-awareness and reflection

Module Content: Through a series of interactive workshops and performances, participants develop themselves professionally as (i) Leaders and Team players (ii) Presenters and Communicators (iii) Time, Organisational and Performance Managers. Performances across the programme are used as learning experiences. Participants learn to develop their self-awareness, reflect on their performances and actively achieve progress in their personal transformation. Developmental coaching is provided to all participants by a Professional Coach Trainer. Participants complete the ECDL.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate and awareness of their own developing mindset and appraise their own scholarly and professional capabilities
· Identify and comment on their own strengths with examples from their learning experiences
· Identify and comment on their own blindspots with examples from their learning experiences
· Analyse how their own values and beliefs affect their mindsets
· Communicate effectively
· Appraise their own role within a team and be able to evaluate the overall benefits of team work
· Demonstrate their ability to manage their performances and priorities
· Demonstrate and communicate how their own self-awareness and reflection has developed through the presentation of a portfolio of self reflections and interview
· Use Computer Technology.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (1 x Personal Reflective Journal 60 marks, 1 x Interactive Blog 30 marks, 1 x 3,000 word team project 40 marks, 2 x presentations 20 marks each, 1 x interview 20 marks, 1 x ECDL 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC1111 Economic Data Collection

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops, Practicals); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore economic data collection

Module Content: Participants will explore the following types of questions: How are key measures of the economy, business, household and government collected? How does data fit in to the research process? What are the different types of economic data used for research, business decision-making, and public policy? What does the data measure? What methods are used to collect data? Participants will receive an introduction to Excel.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Recognise the issues involved in collecting primary and secondary data
· Give an account of different ways in which data is classified
· Give an account of how different economic data are collected and what they measure
· Identify sources of economic data
· Identify patterns in the data
· Suggest economic questions arising from the data
· Use Excel to store and present economic data.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 x Excel Project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC1112 Economic Data As Evidence

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops, Practicals); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To evaluate how economic data is used as evidence in economic arguments and in decision making.

Module Content: Participants will explore the following types of questions: How can data be presented and described? How can data be used as evidence? What data should we use to answer different questions? How do economists evaluate the usefulness and quality of the main sources and types of economic data used for economic analysis? Participants will use Excel.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe economic phenomena using descriptive statistics
· Demonstrate how data is used to support economic arguments
· Present the data effectively and for different audiences
· Investigate the data behind economic analysis
· Identify relationships in the data
· Critically evaluate the usefulness of data used for economic analysis
· Use Excel for data calculation, manipulation and presentation.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x project 1,000 words each, 50 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination:

[Top of page]

EC1113 The World of Economics - Co-operation in the Economic System

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials; 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the Economic way of thinking through the application of key ideas and theories in public policy. To explain how co-operation by consumers, firms and government affect the allocation of resources and the distribution of income and goods.

Module Content: Participants will learn to use the economic method of thinking by examining the following questions: What is the economic system? How does the market operate as a discovery process? What framework can we use to understand the determination of prices and quantities in a market? How do consumers and firms make decisions? What is the impact of government policies on decision making by consumers and firms? How do we as Economists understand human behaviour? How do we analyse strategic interaction?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify economic relationships and explain what affects them
· Apply the skills of economic thinking to analyse contemporary issues
· Evaluate debate and think about critical issues in a rigourous way, using economic concepts
· Critically evaluate and assess economic arguments presented in public media.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 x Project 2,000 words, 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC1114 The World of Economics - Public Policy in the Economic System

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials; 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Aileen Murphy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the Economic method of thinking and analysis through the application of key ideas and theories in public policy. To explain how the interaction of decisions by consumers, firms and government affect the allocation of resources and the distribution of income and goods within the economic system. To develop the understanding of and practice the skills required to use a coherent economic accounting framework in decision making, by households, business and the public sector.

Module Content: Participants will learn to examine the economic role and impact of public policies in relation to the following types of question: Why is macroeconomic stability sought after? How can macroeconomic stability be achieved? How are fiscal, monetary and business related policies implemented in the European and global economy context? How can the aforementioned policies affect economic development and income/prosperity distribution?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify economic relationships and explain what affects them
· Evaluate, debate and think about critical issues in a rigourous way, using economic concepts
· Distinguish between fiscal and monetary policy and evaluate the effect of specific measures on economic activity
· Critically evaluate and assess economic arguments presented in public media, using economic concepts
· Apply the skills of economic thinking to analyse contemporary issues
· Distinguish between the main economic accounts and indicators
· Analyse the main economic indicators
· Present the components of the main economic accounts and indicators graphically.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 x Project (2,000 words, 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC1115 The World of Economics: Coordination and Individual Decision Making

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials; 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Frank Crowley, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce students to key concepts of the market economy. To explain what motivates individuals, how they make decisions and how they try to maximise their happiness levels.To examine the role of the entrepreneur in market economies and to understand how the activities of consumers and the entrepreneurs are coordinated by prices in the market economy. To understand the efficiency outcomes of allocated resources in society by using markets.

Module Content: Participants will learn to use the Economic way of thinking through an examination of the following types of questions: Why do individuals have to make decisions? What is meant by opportunity cost? Why are decisions made at the margin? What is meant by diminishing marginal utility? What is meant by subjective value? How rational are individuals? What is the role of incentives in the market economy? What is coordination? How can people voluntarily - without anyone telling them what to do - make their actions fit together in an efficient and orderly way?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify what motivates consumes and how consumers make decisions
· Explain how the market economy works as a discovery process in the search for an efficient allocation of resources
· Explain how the market economy satisfies the wants and needs of consumers
· Identify economic relationships between economic agents and explain what motivates them
· Identify and explain key concepts underlying the market economy.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 x Project 2,000 words).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC1117 Markets and Governments An Introduction to Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The basic principles of economic analysis are introduced, with particular reference to their use in understanding social issues.

Module Content: Unemployment, poverty, discrimination, growth and the standard of living. The role of markets and government in achieving social goals and public policy objectives is examined.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Use supply-demand analysis to interpret how markets respond to changing conditions.
· Distinguish different types of government policy and use supply-demand analysis to investigate how they affect activity levels in particular markets and identify who gains and who loses from the policies.
· Identify the main conditions under which markets do not function efficiently and analyse the policy measures available to government and how they remedy the deficiencies.
· Describe, illustrate and measure the extent of income inequality in Ireland and other countries.
· Distinguish the mains types of poverty and how they are measured and describe who is affected by poverty in Ireland and compare poverty levels in Ireland and other countries.
· Identify the main economic costs and benefits of education and distinguish, calculate and interpret the private, state and societal rates of return from investments in education.
· Describe the main statistical measures of macroeconomic activity in Ireland and show how they are related.
· Construct a model of a macro-economy, perform calculations on it to establish what determines the level of national income and well-being and how they respond to changes in government policies.
· Identify how trade policies in developed countries affect living stands in developing countries.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In class exam 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC1118 Markets and Governments An Introduction to Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The basic principles of economic analysis are introduced, with particular reference to their use in understanding social issues.

Module Content: Unemployment, poverty, discrimination, growth and the standard of living. The role of markets and government in achieving social goals and public policy objectives is examined.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Use supply-demand analysis to interpret how markets respond to changing conditions.
· Distinguish different types of government policy and use supply-demand analysis to investigate how they affect activity levels in particular markets and identify who gains and who loses from the policies.
· Identify the main conditions under which markets do not function efficiently and analyse the policy measures available to government and how they remedy the deficiencies.
· Describe, illustrate and measure the extent of income inequality in Ireland and other countries.
· Distinguish the mains types of poverty and how they are measured and describe who is affected by poverty in Ireland and compare poverty levels in Ireland and other countries.
· Identify the main economic costs and benefits of education and distinguish, calculate and interpret the private, state and societal rates of return from investments in education.
· Describe the main statistical measures of macroeconomic activity in Ireland and show how they are related.
· Construct a model of a macro-economy, perform calculations on it to establish what determines the level of national income and well-being and how they respond to changes in government policies.
· Identify how trade policies in developed countries affect living stands in developing countries.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC1121 Markets, Governments and the Economics of Social Issues

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The basic principles of economic analysis are introduced with particular reference to their use in understanding social issues.

Module Content: Unemployment, poverty, discrimination, growth and the standard of living. The role of markets and government in achieving social goals and public policy objectives is examined.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Distinguish how economic and political systems impact on the provision of social care.
· Evaluate current social issues, such as the minimum wage/rent controls, from an economic perspective.
· Distinguish between monetary and fiscal policy and assess the stance of government fiscal policy.
· Identify the main stages of economic development., explain and illustrate the population poverty trap and outline the main reasons why poor countries remain poor.
· Define money, describe its functions and explain the role of banks in creating money.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC1122 Markets, Governments and the Economics of Social Issues

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The basic principles of economic analysis are introduced with particular reference to their use in understanding social issues.

Module Content: Unemployment, poverty, discrimination, growth and the standard of living. The role of markets and government in achieving social goals and public policy objectives is examined.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Define money, describe its functions and explain the role of banks in creating money.
· Distinguish between the main indicators of poverty based on the EU Survey of Income and Living Conditions (SILC).
· Calculate equivalent household size/income using OECD definitions and interpret Gini coefficient values.
· Describe the main causes and consequences of inflation and differentiate between the various measures of unemployment.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC1131 Economic Decision Making

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 600.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr Frank Crowley, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Frank Crowley, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the Economic method of thinking about decision making.

Module Content: The individual decision-making process: happiness economies; risk and uncertainty; the rational individual and utility-maximisers; behavioural economics; information and markets. The business decision-making process; risk and uncertainty, the classical approach; game theory; evloutionary economics. The policy decision-making process.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Critically evaluate and assess economic policy decisions;
· Apply the skills of economic thinking to analyse contempoary decisions;
· Describe and distinguish between the main economic theories used to model decision making;
· Explain the processes of economic decision-making for individuals, business and policymakers.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (Course/Project Work (10 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC1132 Economics, the Markets and Public Policy

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 600.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 48 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 20 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the Economic method of thinking and analysis through practical and application of key ideas and theories.

Module Content: Introducing the economic system and the market economy as a discovery process; analysing how markets work, including the demand and supply framework by household, business and the public sector; consumer decision making; firm decision making; impact of Government policies on decision making by consumers and firms.
The role and impact of public policies in relation to :
-Macroeconomics stability, economic developmnet and income/prosperity distribution and the primary instruments and agencies by which fiscal, monetary and business related policies are implemented in the European and global economy context.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain how the market economy works as a discovery process in the search for efficient allocation of resources;
· Describe economic relationships and identify what influences them;
· Evaluate, debate and think about the critical issues (such as minimum wages, rent controls, carbon taxes) in a rigorous way, using economic concepts;
· Distinguish between fiscal and monetary policy and evaluate the effect of specific measures on economic activity;
· Critically evaluate and assess economic arguments presented in public media;
· Describe and distinguish between the main economic accounts and indicators.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Formal Written Examination 140 marks; Continuous Assessment 60 marks (2 x In-class examinations, 30 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 3 hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 3 hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC1200 Quantitative Techniques for Economics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Tutorials (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the mathematical techniques used in economic analysis using appropriate applications.

Module Content: Introduction to Mathematical Economics: Place and application of mathematical techniques in economic analysis of e.g. the consumer, the firm, the distribution of income and the modelling of the economy as a whole.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Comprehend the rules of differentiation and apply them to optimising economic functions
· Apply some of the various tools in financial economics for calculating monies received or repaid in the future
· Apply matrix arithmetic and use it in applications which involve the solution of simultaneous linear equations, such as in equilibrium, break-even, etc.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x InClass test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC1202 Business Economics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning in a business context.

Module Content: Theory and applied theory of relative prices and distribution of product under different types of market structure. An examination of the economic system including the role of the firm and the role of government.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Evaluate the importance of market structure for economic outcomes.
· Analyse the implications of business and government decisions.
· Apply economic frameworks to specific economic cases.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC1203 Business Economics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Lisa Noonan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning in the macroeconomic business environment.

Module Content: Theory and applied theory of production, employment and income in the monetary economy. The role of money, interest rates, exchange rates, inflation and the financial markets in business decision making is examined.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· measure the economic performance of countries.
· evaluate the importance of institutional structure for country performance.
· analyse the implications of government decisions for the business environment.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC1207 Principles of the Micro Economy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 4 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning to explain the interactions of firms, consumers and government.

Module Content: Theory and application of prices and markets. Distribution of resources and products under different types of market structures and firm behaviour.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the workings of the market using the theory of supply and demand;
· Describe aspects of demand through an understanding of behavioural economics;
· Describe aspects of supply through an understanding of the issues in costs and production;
· Apply economic theory of relative prices and the distribution of resources and product under different market structures and firm behaviour.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC1208 Principles of the Macro Economy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 4 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning in the business context.

Module Content: Theory and applied theory of production, employment and income in the monetary economy, including money, the interest rate, exchange rate, balance of payments, inflation and unemployment.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the origins of macroeconomics and the problems it deals with;
· Describe the long-term trends and short-term fluctuations in economic growth, unemployment, inflation, and the balance of payments;
· Explain why economic growth, unemployment, and inflation matter;
· Identify the monetary policy challenges and describe the tools available in meeting them.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC1209 Understanding and Interpreting Data

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Tutorials (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Lisa Noonan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To acquire the data collection and analysis skills and techniques required for economic analysis and examining economic theory.

Module Content: Types of economic data and their uses. Collection, organisation and storage of economic data for research, business decision-making and public policy. Approaches to presenting and describing economic data. Understanding index numbers. Place and application of basic data analysis techniques and related computer software which are standard in economic analysis.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Recognise the issues involved in the collection and interpretation of primary and secondary economic data.
· Describe economic and financial indicators in Ireland, how these indicators are constructed and the uses and limitations thereof.
· Interpret the work carried out by the Central Statistics Office.
· Present and interpret descriptive statistics.
· Perform economic calculations on computer packages and present these economic calculations in report-like form.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1500 word Project Work).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC1210 Skills for Analysing Economic Data

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Tutorials (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Lisa Noonan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To acquire the data collection and analysis skills and techniques required for economic analysis and examining economic theory

Module Content: Approaches to presenting and analysing economic data. Examining the relationship between variables. Understanding models which can be utilized in time series analysis. Statistical techniques to examine inequality in society. Place and application of basic data analysis techniques and related computer software which are standard in economic analysis.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Apply statistical tools to investigate economic problems.
· Estimate and interpret the relationship between economic variables
· Apply statistical techniques to conduct time series analysis
· Recognise the inequalities which exist in our society today and how through the collection and analysis of economic data, evidence of these inequalities may be seen.
· Perform economic calculations on computer packages and present these economic calculations in report-like form.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1500 word Project Work).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC1211 Quantitative Techniques for Economics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Tutorials (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the econometric techniques used in economic analysis using appropriate applications.

Module Content: Introduction to Econometrics: Nature of econometrics. Basic methods. Applications to the analysis of e.g. demand and supply models, consumption functions, demand for money.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe data using numerical measures
· Apply the rules for finding probabilities
· Recognise several important types of discrete random variables and continuous random variables and use their associated probability models
· Define and compute point estimates and confidence intervals for various population parameters
· Conduct tests of hypothesis about various population parameters.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC1212 Economics of Business 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr Richard O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Richard O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop the learners understanding of economic theory and methodology corporate business, and to facilitate the application of economic reasoning in analysing contemporary business issues.

Module Content: Theory and applied theory of the firm under different types of market structure. Method, logic and inquiry as tools in analysing how business firms strategise, price and compete.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· critically assess the nature and concept of a business firm
· evaluate the importance of market structure for economic outcomes
· analyse the implications of firm strategy and conduct in business
· apply economic theory to specific economic cases.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC1213 Principles of Economic Analysis 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning in the business context.

Module Content: Theory and applied theory of relative prices and the distribution of resources and product under different types of market structures and firm behaviour.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and describe the core concepts and theories of microeconomics, such as demand, supply and prices.
· Explain economic models and their assumptions.
· Critically evaluate economics related scenarios reported in the media and assess the impact such scenarios can have on everyday life.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC1214 Principles of Economic Analysis 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning in the business context.

Module Content: Theory and applied theory of production, employment and income in the monetary economy, including money, the interest rate, the exchange rate, balance of payments, inflation and unemployment.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe and distinguish between the main economic indicators of activity,
· Produce and interpret economic tools of analysis, such as graphs,
· Perform economic calculations, which enable the learner to appreciate economic concepts with greater clarity,
· Critically evaluate economics related scenarios reported in the media and assess the impact such scenarios can have on everyday life,
· Describe and examine key economic indicators and assess the impact of changes in such indicators on everyday life.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC1500 Economic Analysis for Food Business Part 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning relevant to food business.

Module Content: The market economy; entrepreneurship; the competitive process and technological change; determination of relative prices of goods and factors of production under various types of market structure.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· evaluate the importance of market structure for economic outcomes for food business.
· analyse the implications of business and government decisions for food business.
· apply economic frameworks to specific economic cases in food business.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (MCQ 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC1503 Economic Analysis for Food Business Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning and the concepts and issues relevant to food business.

Module Content: Production; employment and income determination in a monetary economy.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Examiner economic framework and apply the frameworks to food business
· Analyse the production process in food business
· Evaluate the implications of employment and income determination in food business.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (MCQ 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC2006 Transition to Professional Life II

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): EC1109

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24hr(s) Workshops (Coaching); 224hr(s) Directed Study (Community/Workplace participation, Self-directed study, reflective practice).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To grow the perspective and mindset of participants through the development and practice of (i) workplace competencies (ii) and reflection.

Module Content: Through a series of interactive workshops and performances, participants build on their performances to develop themselves professionally as (i) Leaders in their personal development (ii) Active Citizens. Participants choose either: (i) Participation in a Work Experience/Community Involvement/UCC Community Engagement as approved by the School of Economics and subject to ethical clearance or (ii) the development of an international mindset through cultural and economic understanding of specific countries. Performances in the programme are used as learning experiences. Participants continue to develop their self-awareness, reflect on their performances and actively pursue progress in their personal transformation. Selecting learning goals, and career planning are provided and CV preparation.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate an awareness of their own developing mindset, and appraise their own scholarly and professional capabilities
· Identify and comment on their own strengths with examples from their learning experiences
· Identify and comment on their own blindspots with examples from their learning experiences
· Analyse how their own values and beliefs affect their mindsets
· Reflect on and demonstrate their learning and development from experiences in this module
· Appraise their own role within a team and be able to demonstrate the overall benefits of team work
· Demonstrate and communicate how their own self-awareness and reflection has developed through the presentation of a portfolio of self-reflections.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (1 x Project (4,000 words) 80 marks, 1 x Presentation 40 marks, 1 x Personal Reflective Journal 60 marks, 1 x CV document 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC2009 The Changing Economy: Recessions and Booms

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Participants will be able to think through issues and questions about the business cycle using theory and economic data.

Module Content: Participants will explore the workings and the causes of change in the economy through a series of questions, such as: What data can we use to describe how a country's economic performance changes through time? Are there economic and financial indicators which inform us about the future state of the economy? How do economic theories help us to think about the causes of business fluctuations? Why do economists differ in their explanations of the causes of booms and recessions?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate their understanding of key macroeconomic models for understanding the causes of booms and recessions
· Use these models to think through important questions about the Irish and international economy
· Distinguish between the writings of economists on the the causes of booms and recessions
· Research and use data for economic analysis and to answer questions
· Report on and evaluate a country's economic performance using macroeconomic data
· Interpret macroeconomic issues in the media and use such coverage as information for analysis
· Make causal statements and present ideas with clarity and structure
· Work in a team.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x team report 2000 word minimum, 40 marks, 1 x blog, 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) (End of Semester Exam) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2010 The Changing Economy: Money and Monetary Policy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Participants will be able to think through issues and questions about the role of money and credit in the economy and monetary institutions.

Module Content: Participants will explore questions such as: What are the characteristics of money? How is money created? How has membership of Monetary Union affected economic performance? What is the relationship between monetary institutions and government? What monetary instruments are used by Central Bankers? Can monetary policy be used as a tool to stabilise the economy?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate their understanding of key macroeconomic models
· Use these models to think through important questions about the role and effectiveness of monetary policy
· Research and use data for economic analysis and to answer questions
· Specify alternative proposals for dealing with economic problems and evaluate policies
· Interpret macroeconomic issues in the media and use such coverage as information for analysis
· Present ideas with clarity and structure
· .

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 1,500 word report, 30 marks, 1 x presentation, 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2011 The Changing Economy: Government Spending and Tax

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Introduce participants to the concepts of government spending and taxation. Explain the historical conditions which contributed to the emergence of both as key concepts in macroeconomics and indicators of government stability. Analyse government spending and taxation and national and public expenditure accounts. Introduce participants to fiscal policy and how fiscal policy is coordinated and executed.

Module Content: Participants will explore government spending and tax through the following questions: What are the cannons of taxation? What is fiscal policy and how is it used by government? What can the government accounts tell us about the state of the economy? How do various schools of thought differ regarding government intervention in the economy? How does government expenditure and taxation affect wider aspects of the economy such as consumption, investment, inflation and interest rates?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate their understanding of key macroeconomic models
· Use the models to think through important questions about the Irish and international economy
· Research and use data to answer the questions
· Evaluate the usefulness of macroeconomic data sources for economic analysis
· Specify macroeconomic problems, alternative proposals for resolution and debate options
· Interpret macroeconomic issues in the media and use such coverage as information for analysis
· Present ideas with clarity and structure.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 2,000 word project, 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2012 Economic Modelling of Decision Makers

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore the basic mathematical techniques used by individuals, policy makers to aid decision making.

Module Content: Participants will explore the following types of questions: What are economic models? How do we use economic models to analyse economic decision making? How is this applied to analyse economic decision making, for an individual, firm or government. How can a change in key economic variables of the economy, business, House holds and government be operationaly defined, measured and compared?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Summarise and interpret the characteristics of a specific variable using a number of descriptive and graphical techniques
· Construct a simple economic model using mathematical techniques
· Describe how decisions made at the margin can be represented in mathematical form
· Calculate and explain elasticities and multipliers
· Solve economic problems using mathematical techniques such as utility maximisation and cost minimisation
· Communicate the results arising out of an application of a technique studied in this module to non-experts.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 1,000 word quantitative project, 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2013 Empirical Research Methods

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops, Practicals); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore the basic statistical techniques used to formulate and test research questions.

Module Content: Participants will explore the following types of questions: How is sample data used to test research questions? What techniques can be used to visualise the nature and extent of economic relationships? What techniques can be used to estimate the nature and extent of economic relationships? How are forecasts for economics variables generated?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Specify and conduct statistical hypotheses designed to test a research question
· Analyse and report on the relationship between economic variable using correlation and regression techniques
· Apply forecasting techniques to a specifc variable
· Communicate the results arising out of an application of a technique studied in this module to non-experts.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 1,000 word quantitative project, 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2014 Reasoning and Problem Solving in Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Reflective Practice, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Daniel Blackshields, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To foster participant's development through economic reasoning, problem solving and case study analysis.

Module Content: The nature, components and processes of reasoning skills for problem solving and research are explored. The following questions are addressed: What knowledge, skills are needed to embark on the process of understanding problem solving skills? How can mental models of Economics help to understand social phenomena? How can participants formulate appropriate questions amenable to economic analysis? How can participants write case studies and analyse using case studies? Learners will engage in problem solving with economics exercises of their own choice.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Recognise and formulate appropriate questions amenable to economic analysis
· Identify and interpret evidence relating to questions
· Justify their answer to questions
· Think critically and creatively
· Analyse economic arguments using the skills of argumentation and language analysis
· Propose solutions to complex problems of the learner's choice
· Present a reflective journal entry on the learner's problem-solving proficiency.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x briefing memorandum, 40 marks, 1 x newspaper article, 30 marks, 1 x reflective journal, 30 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2015 Research in Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 16 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops, Library Seminars on Search Methods, End Note Training); 104hr(s) Directed Study (Guided and Independent Research, Reflective Practice).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The aim of this module is to equip students with the knowledge and skills necessary to critically evaluate research in economics and prepare for their own research project.

Module Content: The nature, components and processes of economic research are explored. The following questions are addressed: How do we identify and formulate research questions? How do we locate and discuss recent literature in the research area? Where can one find secondary data sources for original research projects? What sources and processes can be used in economic research? What techniques are available when conducting economic research? Learners will engage in identifying an Economics research question of their own choice.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse economic research using the skills of argumentation and language analysis
· Formulate original research question(s)
· Appreciate ethical issues and make ethical judgments in economic research
· Identify and propose methodologies to be used for economic research
· Construct a rationale for specific research questions
· Present a reflective journal entry on the learner's own research journey
· Search efficiently and maintain a database of reference material using on-line search engines and Endnote.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Research Proposal 2,500 words, 50 marks, 1 x suggested reading list, 20 marks, 1 x reflective journal, 30 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2016 Economic Journey Through life Decisions: Economic Information and Uncertainty

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars ( Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Participants will be enabled to develop models of human action to investigate the role of information and uncertainty in individual and firm decision making.

Module Content: Participants will learn how to think about individual choice and decision making through an examination of each of the following questions: What is the impact of information asymmetries on individual decision making? What are the incentives of individuals and firms to maintain or eliminate information asymmetries? What is the impact of risk and uncertainty on the decision making of individuals and groups in market and non-market settings? What is rational behaviour in the presence of uncertainty?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Think about the role of incentives in decision making and in explaining behaviour
· Assess the role of prices in the coordination of resource allocation in modern economies
· Analyse the role of information in determining market outcomes
· Explain the difference between risk averting and risk loving behaviour
· Use concepts such as consumer surplus and expected value
· Formulate policies and strategies for addressing complex economic problems of organisation in selected case studies
· Communicate policies and strategies for addressing complex economic problems or organisation in a scientific manner.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x project 2,000 words, 50 marks,).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2017 Economic Journey Through life Decisions: Firms in a World of Uncertainty

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars ( Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Bernadette Power, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Participants will be enabled to develop mental models of human action to investigate firms in world of uncertainty.

Module Content: Participants will learn how to think about firm decision making through an examination of each of the following questions: Why do firms exist? What are the objectives of firms? How does a firm decide what to produce? Why are some firms big and some firms small? In what way do firms grow?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Think about the role of incentives in decision making and in explaining behaviour
· Recognise key concepts and their causal links to explore the evolution of the organisation of production
· Use data to address complex economic problems
· Formulate policies and strategies for addressing complex economic problems of organisation in selected case studies
· Communicate and present policies and strategies for addressing complex economic problems of organisation in a scientific manner
· Work in a team.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x report, 1,500 words, 30 marks, 1x team presentation, 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2018 Economics Journey Through Life's Decisions: Behavioural Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars ( Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Frank Crowley, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the strengths and weaknesses of the neoclassical models of decision making and understand how they depart from empirical evidence. To examine how the discipline of psychology when combined with economics may help our understanding of how individuals make decisions.

Module Content: Participants will learn to use the Economic Way of Thinking through an examination of the following type of questions: How has behavioural economics fundamentally changed the way Economists conceptualise the world? Why is it dangerous to see patterns in data? How do experts make split-second decisions? Why are we prone to reckless behaviour? When do we need a nudge to make a 'good' decision? Why are large groups of people often smarter than experts? How can we avoid groupthink? How do we use 'rule of thumb' when making decisions? What affect has choice architecture on our decisions? Can choice architecture help individuals make better decisions?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Introduce students to the principles of behavioural economics
· Understand the strengths and weaknesses of neoclassical models of decision making
· Critically evaluate how individuals depart from the assumption of homo-economicus
· Examine the how choice architecture influences individual decisions
· Identify areas that behavioural economics can help policy making.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x project work, 2000 words, 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2100 Microeconomics: Behaviour and Organisations

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics; Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand underpinnings of economic behaviour in microeconomics and practice the use of microeconomics.

Module Content: Consumer and producer behaviour at the level of individual units under different market structures. Risk, uncertainty, time and information in decision-making.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse the theoretical background to predictions of consumer, firm and government behaviour and decision-making.
· Appreciate the issues involved in the different types of coordination and cooperation problems that a society faces.
· Provide analysis to explain how and why markets fail to achieve competitive outcomes, assess any distributional and ethical issues that may arise and evaluate policy responses by governments which might help 'correct' these various types of market failure.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2110 Microeconomics: Organisations and Institutions

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics; Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand and practise the use of microeconomics in the context of business and public policy.

Module Content: Factor markets. Trade, tariffs and industry location. General equilibrium and welfare economics. Market and corporate boundaries. Corporate control and performance.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Assess the role of prices in resource allocation in modern economies.
· Be familiar with the basic concepts of game theory.
· Define the concept of consumer surplus and to demonstrate its importance in economic analysis.
· Demonstrate how choice under uncertainty and information asymmetry leads to issues of moral hazard and adverse selection in markets.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2111 Macroeconomics: Growth and Development

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics; Mr Justin Doran, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand the relationship between policies, institutions, and economic growth and development

Module Content: Determination of the economic growth, consumption, savings and investment. Economic models of growth. The importance of supply side policies. The role of economic policies in economic growth. The importance of institutions and geography.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Evaluate policy decisions and institutional structures on economic growth.
· Describe the development of modern economies.
· Construct and interpret economic growth diagrams.
· Calculate and compare growth rates for international economies.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class test 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2112 Macroeconomics: Business Cycles

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics; Mr Justin Doran, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand the relationship between business, government and the macroeconomic environment.

Module Content: Determination of the level and growth of aggregate income, demand, output and employment. Components of aggregate demand (e.g. consumption, invesetment). Fiscal, monetary and exchange rate policies. Money and other financial assets in the economic system.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Measure macroeconomic performance using key indicators such as consumer price index and labour statistics.
· Differentiate between monetary and fiscal policy.
· Evaluate the impact of fiscal and monetary policy decisions by the government and central bank.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2113 Economic Data and Skills for Data Collection

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC2114

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce and practise the data collection and analysis skills used in economic analysis.

Module Content: The model of research methodology, question formulation, research design, modes of data collection, questionnaire formulation, preliminary analysis.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Formulate a research question.
· Construct and formulate hypothesis;
· Identify appropriate research designs.
· Construct questionnaires;
· Identify the appropriate data analysis technique to use.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x assignment 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2114 Skills for Interpretation of Economic Data

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC2113

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce and practise the data collection and analysis skills used in economic analysis.

Module Content: Approaches to presenting and analysing economic data. Principles and uses of descriptive statistics, including basic regression techniques. Application of data analysis techniques and computer programmes which are standarad in economic analysis.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Estimate and interpret relationships between economic variables;
· Use computer packages to perform economic calculations;
· Interpret economic calculations.
· Perform, organise and present calculations.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x assignment 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2115 Introduction to Mathemathical Economic Analysis

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC2116

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics; Dr Brendan McElroy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the techniques and application of basic mathematical methods and econometrics for microeconomics and macroeconomics.

Module Content: Economic application of graphs and equations. The use of derivatives in economics. Constrained and unconstrained optimisation.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Define what is meant by a derivative and explain its application in economics.
· Apply the rules of differentiation to the analysis of economic models, e.g. utility, production, revenue, costs, profits, elasticity, consumption etc.
· Optimise and graph economic functions.
· Apply some of the various tools in financial economics for calculating monies received or repaid in the future.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (In-class test 1 x 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2116 Introduction to Statistical Economic Analysis

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC2115

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics; Dr Brendan McElroy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the techniques and application of introductory statistics for microeconomics and macroeconomics.

Module Content: Presentation and illustration of the theory and practice of statistical investigation in economics. Introduction to the theory and application of economic hypothesis testing and the interpretation of econometric results.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the relationship between probability and statistical inference.
· Explain the importance of the Central Limit Theorem to statistical inference.
· Compute point estimates and confidence intervals for various population parameters.
· Conduct tests of hypothesis about various population parameters.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2117 Reasoning and Critical Thinking in Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC2118

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Aimee Fox, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop skills in reasoning and critical thinking in Economics.

Module Content: The Lecturer will introduce methods of critical reasoning and explore their application in economic issues.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Recognise and formulate appropriate questions that are amendable to economic analysis.
· Analyse economic arguments using the skills of argumentation and language analysis.
· Prepare judgements on the merits of economic arguments of the popular press.
· Reflect on the learner's problem-solving proficiencies with Economics.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,000 word essays (40 marks each ); 1 x Self- Reflective exercise (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment. Continous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2118 Reflection and Persuasion in Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC2117

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Aimee Fox, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop skills in reasoning and critical thinking in Economics.

Module Content: The Lecturer will introduce methods of critical reasoning and explore their application in economic issues.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Communicate judgements on the merits of economic arguments effectively to non-experts.
· Reflect on the learner's Personal Development Progress (PDP) File in problem-solving.
· Present a reflective journal entry on the learner's problem-solving proficiency and a PDP.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,000 word essays (40 marks each ); 1 x Self- Reflective exercise (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment. Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2151 Economics of Social Policy 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand the role of the market and government in social issues.

Module Content: Labour force participation and employment. Ageing and pensions. Economics of health care and housing.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Comprehend key issues and concepts in social policy
· Apply economic theory in examining issues in social policy
· Employ the skills and techniques required for the evaluation of social policy.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x Project, 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2200 Economics of Managerial Decision Making

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Other (Up to 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To apply microeconomic theory as a methodology to problems faced by decision makers in the public, private and not-for-profit sectors in a global business environment.

Module Content: The lecture topics will begin by examining the rationale for the course. Measurement techniques and quantitative methods are introduced as the need arises. Material is supported by Case Studies and covers the following:
1. Goals of the Firm;
2. Decision Making Under Risk and Uncertainty;
3. Price Determination: Demand/Supply and Elasticity;
4. Business and Economic Forecasting: Regression and Time Series;
5. Analysis of Consumer Behaviour;
6. Budgets and optimal consumption.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify the goals of the firm;
· Distinguish between risk and uncertainty;
· Identify strategies' for managing risk and uncertainty;
· Describe and illustrate the decision making process;
· Distinguish between various definitions of profit;
· Calculate price and income elasticity;

· Forecast using both regression and time-series analysis;
· apply the income and substitution effects to consumer behaviour;
· differentiate between the Slutsky and Hicks in terms of their compensation variation in income.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC2204 Business Microeconomics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide an understanding of how intermediate microeconomic theory can be used as a methodology for understanding economic behaviour in the modern business environment.

Module Content: Functions of the competitive market process, nature of the firm, and role of the firm in the market process are examined. The business plan and firms budget. Risk and uncertainty. Demand and revenue functions. Production and cost analysis. Product and resource markets.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· evaluate the risk involved in business decisions.
· calculate revenue and costs functions for the firm.
· appreciate the differences in market structures.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2205 Business Microeconomics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC2204

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide an understanding of how intermediate microeconomic theory can be used as a methodology for understanding economic behaviour in the modern business environment.

Module Content: Functions of the competitive market process, nature of the firm, and role of the firm in the market process are examined. Market and corporate boundaries. Corporate control and performance. Industry structure and competition analysis. The role of public policy in business.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· investigate the role of the firm in the market process.
· apply competition analysis to case studies of market structures.
· identify the role of public policy in shaping the business environment.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2206 Business Econometrics and Forecasting

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): EC1200 and EC1211 (for BScFin programme only) or equivalent for other programmes.

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 48 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Practicals (up to 10 hours); Tutorials (up to 10 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Siobhan Lucey, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The use of economic theory and econometric methods to understand and evaluate the economic environment of business.

Module Content: Cross section and time series techniques are used to estimate relationships between economic variables and to test economic models using data from the real world.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe and explain the theory underlying the technique of regression analysis
· Develop and estimate a simple econometric model
· Interpret the results from a regression
· Analyse the suitability of the regression results by constructing and interpreting confidence intervals and performing hypothesis tests
· Demonstrate the ability to implement econometric techniques using econometric packages and software
· Develop an appreciation of the usefulness of econometric packages through hands-on experience.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Formal Written Examination 160 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 x in-class exam (20 marks); 1 x 2500 word project (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 3 hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 3 hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as specified by Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2208 Resourcing Organisation and Competitive Capability 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explain how resources are utilised to create organisational capabilities for competing in diverse and changing markets.

Module Content: Principles of, and issues in, organisations. Resource-Based Theory of the Firm. Market Structures, Incentives, Conflicts and Contracts.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate an understanding of the theory and economic concepts used to analyse organisations.
· Identify and analyse significant economic issues regarding the role of organisational resources in performance and competitiveness.
· Describe solutions to such issues using economic reasoning and tools of analysis.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,000 word essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC2209 Resourcing Organisation and Competitive Capability 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explain how organisations can use existing resources to create capabilities for competing in diverse and changing markets.

Module Content: Theory and empirical frameworks employed in the analysis of organisations, Organisational Architecture, Decision-Rights and Incentives. Performance evaluation, Culture and Strategy.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the role of organisational architecture within a firm
· Analyse behaviour in organisations and outline how to make effective managerial decisions using microeconomic theory
· Apply this knowledge to a number of organisational situations, given that business issues increasingly span across traditional functional areas.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,000 word essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC2211 Economics - Production and Costs

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 10.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Other (Up to 10 x1 hr(s) Tutorials).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To apply microeconomic concepts for production process choices that characterise real-world operations management in the modern business environment.

Module Content: Measurement techniques and quantitative methods are introduced as the need arises. Material is supported by Case Studies and covers the following:
1. Economic Evaluation of Projects, Programmes and Policy;
2. The Production Function and Evaluation of Costs;
3. Measuring Competition and Concentration;
4. Monopology: Price and Output Determination, Role of Price Discrimination;
5. Oligopoly Price and Output Determination: Game Theory, Cournot, Collusion;
6. Non-Price Competition - Advertising.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Conduct an economic evaluation of a project, programme or policy;
· Optimise economic functions including Cobb-Douglas;
· Distinguish between technical and economic efficiency and distinguish between technical and economic efficiency;
· Distinguish between various market structures; Measure market power using Concentration Ratios and Herfindal Indices;
· Illustrate and apply the strategic framework of Michael Porter; Distinguish between the various forms of price discrimination;
· Apply Game Theory to strategic decision making;
· Differentiate between Barometric and Dominant price leadership;
· Determine the optimal level of advertising intensity.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC2212 Business Cycles and Macroeconomic Policy Debates

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 10.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 4 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The aim of this module is to introduce students to the economic theory of business cycles. Models of the economy are explored and the impact of Government policy on the macroeconomic business environment are analysed.

Module Content: Theories of business cycles are examined and the roles played by Governments and central banks, the banking sector, firms and households in causing and propagating recessions and booms are analysed. The importance of fiscal and monetary policies in responding to economic shocks is assessed. Current issues in the global macroeconomy are explored and analysed using appropriate techniques.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Understand the causes of fluctuations in the overall level of business activity (the business cycle);
· Demonstrate a good knowledge of the characteristics of aggregate consumption and investment behaviour;
· Analyse the roles (using appropriate frameworks) played by Governments and central banks, the banking sector, firms and households in causing and propagating recessions and booms;
· Evaluate the Governmental fiscal and monetary policies and their consequences;
· Analyse the consequences of a boom for price inflation and competitiveness.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC2213 Growth and Development in the Global Economy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 4 x 1hr(s) Tutorials.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The aim of this module is to introduce students to the factors that drive economic growth using a framework known as the Solow growth model. Key issues such as the public and private sectors' impact on an economy's growth, technology, innovation and knowledge are addressed and policy issues such as poverty are explored.

Module Content: Analysis of the national and international economic frameworks used by economists for understanding growth and development. Macroeconomic policy debates on key issues such as unemployment, poverty and the importance of technology and innovation are explored.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify the determinants of economic growth and discuss their importance in understanding policy decisions of Governments;
· Critique various models of growth and development;
· Evaluate the role of Government policy in affecting economic growth and development and analyse the consequences of intervention;
· Demonstrate a good understanding of current issues such as growth, unemployment and inflation in the global economy.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC2214 The Macroeconomic Environment in the Short term

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Tutorials (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Lee Ann Burke, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To discover the impact of government policy on the macroeconomic business environment.

Module Content: Analysis of short-term variations in national and international economic variables which affect business performance; Models of consumption, investment, government spending, imports and exports; Money, financial markets, interest rates and exchange rates. Impact of government on business conditions and overall economic activity.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and describe macroeconomic performance indicators.
· Describe, explain and differentiate between different models of the macro-economy.
· Describe and explain how monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policy is set in an economy.
· Analyse the impact of government, monetary and exchange rate policies on the national and international economic environment.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2215 The Macroeconomic Environment in the Long term

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Tutorials (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Lee Ann Burke, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To discover the impact of government policy on the macroeconomic business environment.

Module Content: Growth performance of Ireland, EU and developed economies in the medium to long-term; Solow and endogenous growth models; growth accounting; Determinants of industrial competitiveness and national competitive advantage.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and describe macroeconomic performance indicators in the medium to long-term.
· Describe the current Irish and global macroeconomic environment.
· Describe, explain and differentiate between different growth models of the macro-economy.
· Analyse the causes of economic performance and industrial competitiveness in national economies.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2219 Microeconomics and the Individual

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Tutorials (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine the role of the individual consumer in a competitive market process.

Module Content: Examining the microeconomics of Decision-making, judgement and choice.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop the fundamentals of microeconomic theory in business decision-making.
· Describe how theory can be used as a methodology for understanding economic behaviour in the modern business environment.
· Solve microeconomic issues using analytical reasoning based on microeconomic analysis.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2220 Microeconomics and Macroeconomic outcomes

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 10 (-).

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Tutorials (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine the role of the firm and the government in a competitive market process.

Module Content: Examining how microeconomics decisions lead to macroeconomic outcomes.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Critically appraise the approach taken to economic issues and policies
· Appreciate how individual decision making has consequence at a macroeconomic level.
· Express their analyses and appraisals of economic issues and policies in written form.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class Tests).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2900 Economics of Public Policy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Other (Up to 10 x 1 hr(s) Tutorials).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To apply microeconomic theory to a variety of empirical public policy problems.

Module Content: Supply and demand and their interactions. Substitutes and complements. Regressions for case studies. Investment and capital markets. Uncertainty and insurance.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify prices as incentives through the laws of supply and demand;
· Interpret regressions to measure the size of supply and demand effects;
· Evaluate the consequences of substitutes and complements;
· Calculate present value and assess its role in the functioning of investment and capital markets;
· Appreciate the role of uncertainty in capital and insurance markets.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC2905 Economics of Markets and Government

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 20 x 1hr(s) Tutorials; Other (Up to 10 x 1 hr (s) Tutorials).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To apply microeconomic theory to empirical problems in labour and capital markets, both in firms and in the public sector.

Module Content: Labour markets and firm organisation. Incentives and organisation in the public sector. Measuring public sector outcomes with randomised controlled trials.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse worker choices over employment, occupation and location;
· Examine the interactions of workers within firms and the public sector;
· Evaluate incentive structures for public sector workers;
· Assess economic implications of public policy through randomised controlled trials.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x In-class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Spring 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3003 Survey Methods Part 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1. (Students are separated into 2 groups to facilitate work placement and one group is taught in each semester.).

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 6 x 1hr(s) Practicals; Other.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand and apply research and data analysis skills required in conducting business economic and financial surveys.

Module Content: Examines theoretical principles and practice of survey research methods in finance. Areas addressed include the development, design and implementation of financial economic surveys including research design, survey sampling, questionnaire design, data collection, statistical techniques for data analysis, survey reporting and survey errors and ethics. Focus will be on providing a practical grounding in the preparation, conduct and reporting of surveys for business purposes.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop theoretical frameworks and hypotheses in order to investigate a research problem.
· Apply the different sampling techniques used in economic survey design.
· Describe and distinguish between the different modes of data collection.
· Evaluate survey questionnaires in terms of layout, question sequence and question and response format.
· Construct your own survey instrument.
· Describe and present economic data.
· Discuss the character of the relationship between two or more variables, calculating the necessary statistics to determine association and significance.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Project 50 marks each, 1 x In-class test 150 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3004 Survey Methods Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2. (Students are separated into 2 groups to facilitate work placement and one group is taught in each semester.).

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 6 x 1hr(s) Practicals; Other.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand and apply research and data analysis skills required in conducting business economic and financial surveys.

Module Content: Examines theoretical principles and practice of survey research methods in finance. Areas addressed include the development, design and implementation of financial economic surveys including research design, survey sampling, questionnaire design, data collection, statistical techniques for data analysis, survey reporting and survey errors and ethics. Focus will be on providing a practical grounding in the preparation, conduct and reporting of surveys for business purposes.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop theoretical frameworks and hypotheses in order to investigate a research problem.
· Apply the different sampling techniques used in economic survey design.
· Describe and distinguish between the different modes of data collection.
· Evaluate survey questionnaires in terms of layout, question sequence and question and response format.
· Construct your own survey instrument.
· Describe and present economic data.
· Discuss the character of the relationship between two or more variables, calculating the necessary statistics to determine association and significance.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Project 50 marks each, 1 x In-class test 150 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3100 The Economics of Corporate Strategy I

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To analyse and understand the role of economic theory in business strategy.

Module Content: The theory and applied theory of corporate versus competitive strategies, market structures, added value, overall decision making and business objectives.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the role of market structures in making a decision.
· Formulate different business objectives.
· Explain how the product life cycle influences firm decisions.
· Use economics to make better decisions.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word Project or Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3109 The Economics of Corporate Strategy II

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To analyse and understand the role of economic theory in business strategy.

Module Content: The theory and applied theory of distinctive capabilities, competitive pricing, regulation and risk and uncertainty.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Formulate competitive and coroporate strategies.
· Evaluate strategic investment decisions.
· Explain how risk and uncertainty influences firm decisions.
· Examine how government affects the business environment the firm faces and influences the strategic behaviour of firms.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word Project or Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3119 Capital Markets and Asset Valuation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics; Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine the operation of the financial markets and the valuation of financial assets.

Module Content: Capital (money, equity, and bond) markets are analysed in terms of the principles of asset valuation. The economic reasoning driving the evolution of asset prices is examined.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the foundations of valuation models.
· Apply the concepts of the time value of money to making financial decisions.
· Analyse how risk affects financial decision making.
· Discuss the fundamental analysis of capital markets.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word Project/Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3120 Portfolio Theory and Asset Management

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics; Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine the risk/return trade off in asset portfolio construction and to understand the workings of the asset management industry.

Module Content: Understanding risk and return, principles of portfolio construction, portfolio performance evaluation.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe measures of risk and return in individual assets.
· Explain the components of portfolio risk.
· Describe optimisation techniques in portfolio construction.
· Describe the key features of the asset management industry.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word Project/Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3127 Economics and the Labour Market

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module develops an understanding of the workings of the labour market using economic theory in the field of human resources.

Module Content: Labour market. Supply of labour, demand for labour, government policy.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the basic theoretical models of labour economics and how these can be applied to policy issues.
· Develop a more comprehensive understanding of the Irish labour market.
· Develop a practical and theoretical insight into current practices and contemporary developments in human resources economics.
· Explore demand and supply issues in the labour market.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word project or essay.).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3128 Human Resource Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To investigate the use of economic theory in the field of human resources.

Module Content: Labour market. Compensation and remuneration schemes and other issues that can impact on labour market outcomes.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate an understanding of the importance of labour and human resources from a business perspective.
· Investigate human resource issues and practices using appropriate theory and evidence.
· Identify and analyse key human resource issues such as the remuneration of staff.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word project or essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3129 Health Economics: The Role of the Market

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics; Dr Lee Ann Burke, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand the role of the Market in the health care sector.

Module Content: The application of economic theory to the healthcare market. The demand and supply of health care goods and services. Economic evaluation of healthcare goods and services.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the contribution of economics to health.
· Apply a cross section of economic theory including public choice, consumer behaviour and economic evaluations.
· Analyse and provide solutions to problems that have significant economic consequences, both for the health care industry and society at large.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word project/essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3130 Honours Dissertation

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 1hr(s) Workshops (Guided Research and self directed study).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The objective of this module is to develop writing, presentation, communication and research skills. Students are to be enabled to develop the skills, attitudes and experience necessary to engage in competent research.

Module Content: Research Questions are chosen in the following research areas: Business, Finance, Health in consultation with a research advisor. Theories, concepts, empirical research methods and skills will be used to answer these research questions. Participants will be given the opportunity to reflect on and develop their scholarly, professional and personal capabilities.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Design, prepare and present a research dissertation
· Design a viable research question for the development of a dissertation
· Identify, collect and assess the relevant data for answering a research question
· Identify and use appropriate methods and techniques for answering the research question
· Use economic theories and concepts to think about a research question in Economics
· Communicate the research to their peers, an academic audience and to a non-expert audience
· Develop their self awareness and reflect on their scholarly, professional and personal development.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (1 x 1500 word Research Proposal, 20 marks; 1 x 2500 word Preliminary Research Review, 40 marks; 1 x 6,000 word dissertation to be submitted on a date specified by the Department ; 98 marks; 1 x end of year presentation: 42 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3134 Transition for Professional Life III

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC2006

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Other (workshops, coaching); 224hr(s) Directed Study (Reflective Practice, Guided & Independent Research).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To grow the perspective and mindset of participants through the development and practice of (i) workplace competencies (ii) and reflection.

Module Content: Through a series of interactive workshops and performances participants develop themselves professionally as leaders in their own personal development and career planning. Participants research specific issues for and/or specific problems in the work environment of the business/public sector/voluntary sector and apply their problem solving and creative skills and present their findings. Participants learn to develop their self-awareness, reflect on their performances and actively pursue progress in their personal transformation. Learning goals, career planning and CV preparation are provided.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate an awareness of their own developing mindset, and appraise their own scholarly and professional capabilities
· Identify and comment on their own strengths with examples from their learning experiences
· Identify and comment on their own blindspots with examples from their learning experiences
· Analyse how their own values and beliefs affect their mindsets
· Demonstrate Interview Preparation and Career Planning
· Demonstrate and communicate how their own self-awareness and reflection has developed through the presentation of a portfolio of self-reflections and interview
· Consult with and question a practitioner and identify particular problems and issues
· Think critically and creatively, using their problem solving skills.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (1 x Personal Reflective Journal, 40 marks, 1 x Interview, 40 marks, 1 x CV document, 20 marks, 1 x interview preparation document, 20 marks, 1 x mock interview, 20 marks, 1 x project (3,000 words) 60 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC3135 Health Economics: The role of Public Policy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics; Dr Lee Ann Burke, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand the role of Public Policy in the health care sector

Module Content: The application of economic theory to the production and supply of healthcare goods and services. The market for health care. Health policy and the role of governments. The Irish health care sector.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the contribution of economics to health.
· Analyse health care markets and the role of Government in health care.
· Analyse and provide solutions to problems that have significant economic consequences for the health care market.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word project/essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3136 Firms and Innovation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100 Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Frank Crowley, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module will enable students to investigate the importance of innovation for economic growth and the role of firms in the innovation process.

Module Content: Participants will learn to use the Economic way of thinking through an examination of the following questions: How important is innovation for economic growth? What are the current ideas about innovation? What is the difference between creativity, invention and innovation? How important are entrepreneurs for innovation? What process do firms undertake to innovate? What are the most important factors that enhance or inhibit the ability of firms to innovate? Is interaction with external agents important for innovation? How important is innovation for firm performance?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the importance of innovation for economic growth
· Critically assess the role of firms in the innovation process
· Describe the role of the firm in key models of innovation in the theoretical and empirical literature
· Identify the factors that are most important for enhancing or inhibiting the ability of firms to innovate.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x project 2,500 words, 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC3137 The Economics of Creativity

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Study, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Daniel Blackshields, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module will enable participants to investigate the complex, multidimensional nature of creativity using the conceptual lens of motivation, incentives and institutions.

Module Content: Participants will be able to identify, reflect upon, apply and develop their proficiencies in performing like an economist investigating the theme of creativity through questions such as: What are the personal and institutional antecedents of creativity performance in the arts and commerce? How do economists identify personal and professional evidence of the cognitive drivers of creative performance? How can a creative mentality by fostered in individuals, teams and organisations?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify personal and professional evidence of the cognitive drivers of creativity
· Analyse the mental models enabling and restricting creative performance
· Present arguments for the economic antecedents of creative performance
· Critically assess arguments such as: the links between economy and culture
· Consider the role for government in fostering creativity
· Prepare judgments on the economic arguments for the factors governing creative performance.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x conference participation, 70 marks, 1 x Poster Presentation, 20 marks, 1 x In-class exam, 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC3138 The Role of Place for Innovation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Frank Crowley, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Students will examine the impact of 'place' and geography for innovation in countries.

Module Content: Participants will learn to use the Economic way of thinking through an examination of the following type of questions: Does 'place' matter for innovation? Why do some 'places' exhibit more innovation potential? Do creative spaces encourage innovation? How do creative spillovers occur? How important is the heterogeneity of regions for creating heterogeneity in innovation potential? What is the role of local and national agencies in supporting innovation? Why should Government agencies intervene in the process of innovation? What are the current 'ideas' of policy intervention?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify how differences in places create differences in innovation potential in regions.
· Use key theories to analyse the different influence of place
· Critically assess the role of institutions in creating an environment that encourages innovation
· Identify methods that government agencies can use to enhance innovation by firms in regions.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x policy report 2,500 words, 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC3139 The Wealth and Poverty of Nations: International Cooperation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Students will be able to think through issues and questions on International Cooperation using theory and economic data.

Module Content: Students will explore the reasons for and benefits of international cooperation through exploring questions such as: Why is there trade? Why do countries want to remove trade barriers? Students will incorporate professional skills to address these questions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate their understanding of relevant economic theories and models
· Use theoretical and empirical reasoning to think through important questions about Irish and global economic development
· Use concepts such as strategic interaction to analyse economic cooperation
· Research and use data to answer economic questions
· Present ideas with clarity and coherence
· Work in a team.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Project (2,500 words), 50 marks, 1 x Team Presentation, 20 marks, 1 x In-Class Exams, 30 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC3140 The Wealth and Poverty of Nations: Economic Growth and Development

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Participants will be able to think through and formulate arguments on the determinants of the wealth and poverty of nations.

Module Content: Through a series of guided performances and reading, participants will explore the causes of how prosperity is generated through questions such as: What determines the wealth and poverty of nations? Can Official Development Aid stimulate development? How do economists analyse institutions and why does a country's institutions matter? How can we analyse the drivers of a country's competitiveness?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate their understanding of relevant economic theories and models
· Demonstrate an awareness of the complexity of the forces at work in the long run performance of economies
· Demonstrate an understanding of the usefulness of key growth theories for explaining the growth performance of countries
· Use theory and evidence to think through important questions about Irish and global economic development and poverty and to identify and debate targeted solutions
· Discuss and evaluate the contributions of different economists to our understanding of the determination of prosperity and poverty across nations
· Research and use data to answer economic questions
· Present ideas with clarity and coherence
· Work in a team.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x team report (minimum 2,500 words), 50 marks, 1 x team presentation, 20 marks, 1 x In-Class Exams, 30 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC3141 The Wealth and Poverty of Nations: Financial Institutions and Markets

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Participants will be able to understand the operation of banks and financial markets and the implication for countries' economic performance

Module Content: Through a series of guided performances and reading, participants will explore the following questions: Why did banks develop? What functions do they provide in an economy? How do they manage risk? How does micro-finance work? How do financial markets (capital, money and equity) contribute to economic growth, development and the business cycle? What causes these markets to fail? What innovations have been developed by financial institutions to channel funds from lenders to borrowers? Why and how are these markets and institutions regulated? Is regulation hampering economic growth?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain why banks initially developed
· Evaluate the relevance of these explanations for current banking activities
· Use appropriate measures to assess bank performance
· Differentiate between banking risks and explain how banks attempt to manage such risks
· Explain the concept of market efficiency and its implications for financial markets
· Debate, using empirical and theoretical evidence, whether banks and financial markets should be regulated
· Analyse the role that finance plays in the economic growth performance and development of specific countries
· Research and use data to answer economic questions.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 2,000 word report, 40 marks, 1 x blog, 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC3142 Methods for Economic Investigation: Survey Design and Implementation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops, Practicals); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Develop the student's range of research skills through survey design and implementation. Participants will collect and analyse primary data through designing and implementing a survey results.

Module Content: Examples of questions explored in the module include: What are the advantages and disadvantages of questionnaires as a data collection method? How do we select the most appropriate questions for a variety of research scenarios? How is a research survey created and implemented? How does question design influence the reliability and validity of the questionnaire? Participants should be able to apply the knowledge, skills and understanding of survey methods to their own projects.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Formulate a research design
· Collect and interpret both quantitative and qualitative data
· Create and implement a research survey to test a research question
· Demonstrate an understanding of coding data
· Summarise and interpret the characteristics of the data collected using a number of descriptive and graphical techniques
· Demonstrate their understanding and interpretation of their own and other author's empirical research results
· Communicate the research results arising out of an application of a technique studied in this module to an expert and non-expert audience.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x project 2,500 words, 50 marks, 1 x In-Class Exam 30 marks, 1 x pilot survey (1000 words) 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3143 Research Methods for Economic Investigation: Empirical Econometrics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars (Workshops, Practicals); 100hr(s) Directed Study (Directed Reading, Project Work).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Justin Doran, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Develop the participant's range of research skills by introducing more advanced techniques for conducting empirical research using the theories learnt in the thematic modules.

Module Content: Participants will apply more advanced methods and techniques to primary and secondary data in order to test a hypothesis and communicate the results. Examples of questions explored in the module include: How can data be analysed and interpreted using econometrics? How can scientific hypotheses be formulated using theories and tested using empirical econometric techniques? Participants will choose empirical research questions for investigation with statistical and econometric packages.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Summarise and interpret the characteristics of the data collected using survey and econometric techniques
· Demonstrate their understanding and interpretation of their own and other author's empirical research results
· Develop an econometric model to analyse a research question
· Estimate an econometric model, interpret and evaluate results
· Display proficiency in the use of statistical software programs in the application of a technique studied in this module
· Communicate the research results arising out of an application of a technique studied in this module to an expert and non-expert audience.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x project 1500 words).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3144 Honours Dissertation

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 1hr(s) Workshops; 236hr(s) Directed Study (Guided and Independent Research).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Students are to be enabled to develop the skills, attitudes and experience necessary to engage in competent research.

Module Content: Research Questions are chosen in the following research areas: Business, Finance, Health in consultation with a research advisor. Theories, concepts, empirical research methods and skills are used to answer these research questions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Design, prepare and present a research dissertation
· Identify and critically evaluate the literature relating to a research question
· Identify, collect and assess the relevant data for answering a research question
· Identify appropriate methods and techniques for answering the research question
· Use economic theories and concepts to answer a research question in Economics
· Use appropriate methods and techniques for answering a research question in Economics
· Communicate the research to an academic audience and to a non-expert audience.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks ( 1 x 3000 word Preliminary Research Review, 70 marks; 1 x newspaper article, 30 marks, 1 x 6,000 word dissertation to be submitted on a date specified by the Department, 80 marks, 1 x end of year presentation, 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3145 Public Expenditure: How the Government Spends Taxpayer's Money

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To analyse the reason for, and implications of, public expenditure.

Module Content: Analysis of government expenditure and the methods by which it is financed from both a traditional public finance perspective and a public choice perspective. The economic evaluation methods for public expenditure are examined using examples from sports capital expenditure and the National Lottery.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Collect, present and analyse public finance data from both electronic and traditional sources.
· Construct and uses diagrams that illustrate an understanding of public expenditure theory.
· Use economic evaluation methods such as cost-benefit analysis.

· Choose the appropriate grant instruments to achieve public policy objectives.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word Project/Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3146 Public Finance: Where the Government Gets its Revenue

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand and analyse the relationship between taxation expenditure and finance and private sector behaviour.

Module Content: The use of taxation to encourage investment, discourage drinking and smoking, and to combat crime is discussed. Ireland's fiscal relation with Europe is presented.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· List the important case law on taxation and criminality in Ireland.
· Collect, present and analyse taxation data.
· Examine taxation decisions using economic theory.
· Choose the appropriate tax instruments to achieve public policy objectives.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word Project/Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3147 Economic Growth and Competitiveness

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore models and sources of economic growth and business competitveness as drivers of regional and national economic growth performance.

Module Content: The 'Stylised facts' of growth. The Theories of Solow and Endogenous Growth. Convergence among countries - fact or fallacy? Developing countries and poverty traps. Economic Development as Business Development; Porter's 'Diamond Model'. The Global Competitiveness Report; National competitiveness case studies. Regional and national competitveness and its sources. Clusters and competitiveness.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Appreciate the complexity of the forces at work in the long run performance of economies.
· Demonstrate an understanding of the usefulness of key growth theories for explaining the growth performance of countries.
· Interpret data on the growth of countries.
· Evaluate the cogency of arguments proposed about the growth performance of countries and regions.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word project/essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3148 Economic Growth and Innovation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Ms Marie O'Connor, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Marie O'Connor, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore models and sources of business innovation as a driver of business competitiveness and economic growth.

Module Content: The role of knowledge and innovation in the market process. The economics of business innovation. Sources of knowledge for innovation. Defining and measuring innovation. The innovation Value Chain. Open Innovation and networks. Entrepreneurship and innovation.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate an understanding of the role of innovation in explaining the growth performance of countries.
· Interpret data on innovation.
· Evaluate the cogency of arguments proposed about innovation and the economic performance of countries.
· Explain the role of entrepreneurship in driving innovation and economic growth.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word project/essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3149 Economics Principles of Insurance I: Theory and Concepts

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the fundamental concepts in risk, uncertainty and insurance.

Module Content: Risk and risk management. Identifying and quantifying risks. Role of insurance. Risk aversion and the demand for insurance. Adverse selection and moral hazard. Limits on the insurability of risk.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify risk faced by individuals and businesses and choose appropriate risk management techniques for these risks.
· Calculate risks given certain criteria and demonstrate how these risks can be reduced through diversification and/or risk pooling.
· Explain how insurers price insurance contracts
· Distinguish issues that reduce the insurability of risk and discuss how insurers can counteract these issues via contractual provisions.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word Project/Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3150 Economics Principles of Insurance II: Applications to Health Insurance

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To apply the fundamental concepts in risk, uncertainty and insurance to the demand and supply of health care.

Module Content: Role of insurance in health care systems. Experience of health insurance in international systems. Health insurance in the Irish context.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Show how health insurance can contribute to the financing of healthcare systems.
· Discuss the experiences of various countries with health insurance market in Ireland.
· Apply insurance principles to the assessment of the private health insurance market in Ireland.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word Project/Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3151 Economics of Social Policy 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand the role of the market and government in social issues.

Module Content: Further application of economic analysis to social issues such as unemployment, income maintenance, pensions, social welfare, social insurance, health and education. The concept, principles and functioning of the 'Welfare State' will be examined and issues for future development will be identified and considered.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Comprehend and apply economic analysis to social issues such as poverty, inequality, education, health and old age.
· Examine and discuss the aforementioned social issues from both a national and international perspective.
· Examine the measurement of social issues, for example identify measures of poverty, measures of inequality etc.
· Collect and assess data on social issues.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x Project, 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3152 Quantitative Methods: Econometrics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC3153

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials; 10 x 1hr(s) Practicals.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand and apply the theory of econometrics in both the business and public policy environment.

Module Content: Cross section and time series techniques are used to examine the effectiveness of government policy and business decisions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· List the steps in applied regression analysis for conducting economic research.
· Explain the properties of Ordinary Least Square estimators.
· Select and employ techniques for analysis economic theory.
· Identify and solve for problems in regression analysis.
· Build a model that can be used for econometric research.
· Choose an econometric model by applying certain specification criteria.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x project 10 marks; 1 x In-class Test 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3153 Quantitative Methods: Econometrics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC3152

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 10 x 1hr(s) Tutorials; 10 x 1hr(s) Practicals.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand and apply the theory of econometrics in both the business and public policy environment.

Module Content: Cross section and time series techniques are used to examine the effectiveness of government policy and business decisions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· List the steps in applied regression analysis for conducting economic research.
· Explain the properties of Ordinary Least Square estimators.
· Select and employ techniques for analysis economic theory.
· Identify and solve for problems in regression analysis.
· Build a model that can be used for econometric research.
· Choose an econometric model by applying certain specification criteria.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x project 10 marks; 1 x In-class Test 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3154 Survey Methods: Questionnaire Design

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC3155

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop and use the skills required for conducting economic surveys.

Module Content: The development and design of questionnaires for economic surveys. Strategies for generating a good questionnaire and minimising non-response. Consider the role of survey errors and ethics while trying to ensure reliability and validity.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the various stages involved in the creation and distribution of a questionaire for an economic survey;
· Produce a questionnaire;
· Solve the problems of survey research, such as a questionnaire validity and reliability, and non-response.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word project or essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3155 Survey Methods: Quantitative Analysis

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC3154

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop and use the skills required for conducting economic surveys.

Module Content: The collection and analysis of primary and secondary data generated from economic surveys. Coding and minimising errors while generating results. Reporting and presenting results.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the various aspects involved in the creation and implementation of a quantitative economic survey.
· Evaluate the usefulness of survey data.
· Apply estimation techniques using a quantitative and qualitative approach.
· Report results and draw conclusions.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,200 word project/essay).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3205 Economics of Information

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 48 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine the role of economic information in business decision-making systems.

Module Content: Transaction costs, contracts, firm boundaries, vertical and horizontal integration; Incomplete and asymmetric information, moral hazard, agent-principle issues and governance; Risk, uncertainty and insurance; Signalling, screening and adverse selection; Innovation, patenting, liability, cost-benefits evaluation; Game theory, pricing strategies and network pricing.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Compute the costs and benefits in economic decisions with a cost-benefit analysis framework.
· Evaluate the strategic decisions of economic agents.
· Determine the implications of incomplete or asymmetric information.
· Design and apply pricing strategies.
· Identify the transaction costs involved in economic decisions.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Formal Written Examination 160 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 x 2,000 Word Assignment - 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 3 hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Spring 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 3 hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC3208 Economic Consulting

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2. (Group One will take this module in Semester 2, Group Two will take this module in Semester 1).

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Seminars (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Don Walshe, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop and practice the knowledge and skills required for using economic and financial analysis in carrying out consultancy projects.

Module Content: This module describes the consultancy process and the stages involved in conducting a consultancy project. It examines the skills required in managing a consultant/client relationship. Topics covered include acquiring consultancy projects, briefs and contracts; researching the client business areas; constructing consultancy reports; managing client relationships and a portfolio of clients; professional practice and personal values; ethical principles, dilemmas and conflicts of interest. Case Studies will be used extensively to provide practical experience of the issues.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Prepare and deliver a presentation in a professional manner.
· Explain how ethical decisions are made and apply ethical decision-making theories and models to their own actions.
· Assess the quality of arguments, identifying rhetoric and fallacies in arguments.
· Write a professional consultancy proposal document.
· Explain the knowledge and skills required for using economic and financial analysis in consultancy projects.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 1,000 word essays 40 marks each; Presentations 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3209 Time Series Analysis

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2. (Group One will take this module in Semester 2, Group Two will take this module in Semester 1).

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures; Practicals (up to 5 hours).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To study modern techniques used to examine trends in, and between, financial time series data. Such techniques are commonly used in both risk management and forecasting in Finance.

Module Content: ARIMA Modelling and Forecasting; Introduction to Unit Root Testing and Cointegration; Volatility Modelling: ARCH, GARCH and EGARCH models; Introduction to Technical Analysis

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Have an increased knowledge of econometric methodology
· Recognise the importance of econometrics as an analysis technique
· Differentiate between data types
· Have an increased ability to implement econometric techniques using econometric packages and software.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 2500 word assignment (25 marks), 1 x In-class exam (75 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3210 Principles of Insurance for Finance

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2. (Group One will take this module in Semester 2, Group Two will take this module in Semester 1).

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the fundamental concepts in risk, uncertainty and insurance with applications to financial markets.

Module Content: Risk and insurance. Role of information asymmetry. Adverse selection and moral hazard. Risk management in financial markets.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify risk faced by individuals and businesses and choose appropriate risk management techniques for these risks
· Calculate risks given certain criteria and demonstrate how these risks can be reduced through diversification and/or risk pooling
· Distinguish issues that reduce the insurability of risk and discuss how insurers can counteract these issues via contractual provisions
· Apply risk management principles to financial markets.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Coursework Individual 1 x Essay 3000 words (20 marks), 1 x Inclass Test (80 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3211 Advanced Data Analysis for Finance

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2. (Group One will take this module in Semester 2, Group Two will take this module in Semester 1).

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 12 x 1hr(s) Practicals (computer practicals).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Rosemary Kelleher, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand and apply research and data analysis skills required in conducting business economic and financial surveys.

Module Content: Examines techniques for research problem formulation in business, economic and financial research (e.g. literature searching, building conceptual models). Explores different research designs (survey methods, experimental economics, case studies and interviews) and the reliability and validity of variables in business, economic and financial datasets. Data processing and data entry. Introduces students to non-parametric tests and to the estimation nonparametric regression models using SPSS.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Clearly formulate a framework to investigate a business finance research problem.
· Discern the quality of data from secondary data sources gathered using different research designs.
· Code, enter, clean and transform data in SPSS.
· Use nonparametric tests and contrast these with standard parametric statistical tests in SPSS.
· Estimate nonparametric regression models in SPSS.
· To describe and present financial economic data to a professional standard.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x in-class test (80 marks); 1 x 2500 word assignment (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3213 Money, Credit and Banking

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Don Walshe, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The objective of this module is to provide students with a theoretical and practical appreciation of the relationships between money, credit provision and the banking system in a modern capital markets setting.

Module Content: Key topics in this module include: the concept and role of money in a modern open economy; the relationship between money supply and credit provision; the evolving nature of the international banking system; and, the interaction between the banking system and the real economy.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Discuss the concept and measurement of money in a modern open economy
· Appreciate the theoretical and practical interactions between money, credit provision, and the international banking system
· Collect and manipulate money, credit and banking data
· Deliver a critique of policy relating to money, credit, and banking.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 2,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3214 International Finance

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Don Walshe, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The objective of this module is to provide students with a theoretical and practical toolkit for analysing activity and key events in international capital markets.

Module Content: Key topics in this module include: international parity conditions: international capital markets in an historical context; risk management in international capital markets; foreign exchange markets and the equilibrium exchange rate; the 'Transfer' effect; and, regulation and international financial crises.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Recognise how parity conditions affect asset prices and financial returns across countries
· Implement basic exchange rate valuation techniques using theoretical models
· Discuss risk management techniques in international capital markets and how these practices impact financial stability
· Uncover underlying fragilities in the international financial system and consider how best to address them.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 2,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3215 Economics of Corporate Strategy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Bernadette Power, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Formulation of strategic business decisions using economic theory and business cases.

Module Content: The theory and applied theory of pricing, production and finance considered from the perspective of the firm. Business objectives and corporate organisations. Added value, competitive positioning, sources of competitive advantage. Resource based view. Theories of firm growth. Economies of scale and scope. Transaction costs. Principals and agents. Managerial hierarchies and corporate control. Strategic investment decision-making and evaluation of growth options. Diversification and mergers and acquisitions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the role of decision making within firms.
· Examine the strategic behaviour of firms.
· Formulate competitive strategies.
· Evaluate strategic investment decisions.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3216 Economics of Strategic Behaviour

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Jane Power, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Formulation of strategic business decisions using economic theory and business cases.

Module Content: The theory and applied theory of pricing, production and finance considered from the perspective of the firm. Industry Analysis. Strategic behaviour by firms and strategic interaction under different market structures. Entry and exit. Commitment, game theory and dynamic pricing. Demand analysis and market segmentation. Risk and uncertainty in decision-making. Role of government, competition and regulation.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the role of decision making within firms.
· Examine the strategic behaviour of firms and strategic interaction under different market structures.
· Formulate competitive strategies.
· Analyse how risk and uncertainty influence firm decisions.
· Examine how government affects the business environment the firm faces and influences the strategic behaviour of firms.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3217 Finance and Capital Markets

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To further develop concepts and frameworks in the study of financial markets.

Module Content: The theory and practice of portfolio management and treasury management.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Recognise the importance of financial markets for a modern economy.
· Demonstrate a comprehension of the portfolio decision problem & comprehend its implications for asset returns in competitive markets
· Demonstrate a comprehension of the various types of investment assets that can constitute an investment portfolio
· Analyse the importance of the risk management function to a business in an ever-changing market place
· Differentiate between the various methods of restructuring available to a company in financial distress in Ireland.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-Class Exam).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3218 Portfolio Analysis

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To further develop concepts and frameworks in the study of financial markets.

Module Content: The theory and practice of portfolio management and treasury management.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate a comprehension of the fundamentals of market efficiency
· Analyse the implications of financial markets for business.
· Analyse the pricing of investment assets.
· Demonstrate a comprehension of the various types of investment assets that can constitute an investment portfolio
· Examine the fundamentals of portfolio management and evaluation of portfolio performance.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-Class Exam).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3222 Transferable Skills - Economics - Work Placement

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2 and 3.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): ECDL Certification

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 1 x 6month(s) Placements.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To complement classroom teaching with exposure to institutional work processes in business and other relevant organisations.

Module Content: Following the Third Year Spring Examination, students will go on placement from April to September. The work programme will be jointly monitored by a UCC academic mentor and a business mentor in the external organisation. Students will be expected to keep learning logs at agreed intervals. See Placement Handbook for information on devising and submitting logs.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the business, its organisational culture and purpose;
· Critique the practice of communication in an organisational context;
· Demonstrate ability to function independently and in a workplace team;
· Demonstrate the application of the knowledge, skills and competencies of the programme of study to the workplace;
· Reflect on and analyse the learning experience from the work placement.

Assessment: Placement Report to be submitted before the end of September which will be assessed on a Honours/Pass/Fail basis. (See Placement Handbook for exact date).

Compulsory Elements: Work placement in industry, placement report; learning logs; attendance at work placement advisory sessions.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: A Pass judgement.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination. No Supplemental Examination. There is no provision for repeating this module in the Autumn or in a Repeat Year. Students failing this module will not be eligible for the award of an honours degree in the final year.

[Top of page]

EC3223 Transferable Skills - Economics - Research Project

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2 and 3.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): ECDL Certification

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 1 x 6month(s) Other (Research Project).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To complement classroom teaching with exposure to institutional work processes in business and other relevant organisations.

Module Content: Following the Third Year Spring Examination, students will start their reseach project, commencing April, for 6 months. The industry-based research project will be jointly monitored by a UCC academic mentor and a business mentor in the external organisation. The UCC-based research project will be monitored by a UCC academic mentor.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the research culture.
· Demonstrate the process of research and enquiry.
· Prepare and present a research report.
· Demonstrate initiative and/or leadership skills whilst working alone and/or in teams.
· Demonstrate the application of the knowledge, skills and competencies of research.
· Reflect on and analyse the learning experience from the research placement.

Assessment: Submission of research project and a presentation thereon before the end of September which will be assessed on a honours/pass/fail basis. (See Research Handbook for exact date).

Compulsory Elements: Research Project; Presentation and Attendance at research project advisory sessions.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: Pass or Honours judgement.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination. No Supplemental Examination. No Autumn Supplemental Examination. There is no provision for repeating this module in the Autumn or in a Repeat Year. Students failing this module will not be eligible for the award of an honours degree in the final year.

[Top of page]

EC3409 Strategic Interaction and Decision Making

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Seminars.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand and apply the concepts of mathematical economics to the fields of business economics.

Module Content: Strategic and Extensive Forms of a Game, Information Sets, Two Person Games, Mixed Strategies, Mixed Strategy Equilibrium, Dynamic Games, Non Co-operative Games.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and explain the principles of game theory.
· Construct and analyse game trees and pay-off matrices.
· Solve simultaneous and sequential games, one-off and repeated games, games with single and mixed strategies.
· Explain what is meant by a credible threat and show how it can be used effectively in a game.
· Assess the importance of information in game theory.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1x 1,000 word project 40 marks, 1 x in-class presentation 10 marks, 1 x in-class test 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 5% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3900 The Market for Labour

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Lisa Noonan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop and practise the theoretical and empirical economic method of reasoning as applied to the market(s) for labour.

Module Content: Theoretical and empirical frameworks underpinning a functioning labour market. Supply of labour and human capital investment. Demand for labour, training and education. Employment policies, efficiency wages and insider-outsider theories. Employment activation programmes and the minimum wage.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain key conceptual frameworks and theories.
· Explain how the supply and demand for labour are derived in a functioning labour market.
· Evaluate the complementary roles of businesses and government in the development of human capital for a market economy.
· Assess economic arguments on important issues in labour economics, such as the appropriateness of a minimum wage, employment activation policies and central pay bargaining.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (Written Assignment 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3907 Market Economy 3

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop and practise the theoretical and empirical economic method of reasoning as applied to the market economy.

Module Content: The main theories and related empirical research on the functioning of the market economy, the competitive process as a discovery process, the structure and operation of key units (e.g. business firms, sectors and institutions) and the role of government are presented and used.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain how a market economy system allocates resources and distributes output/income.
· Describe how the dynamic nature of competitive markets and competition as a discovery process generates innovation, growth and prosperity.
· Describe how the price mechanism acts as a transmission and signalling system and results in co-ordination within an economy.
· Read and analyse business, finance and economic issues in the media.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (2 x In class tests 25 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3908 Market Economy 4

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop and practise the theoretical and empirical economic method of reasoning as applied to various markets within a market economy.

Module Content: The competitive process as a discovery process, the structure and operation of key units (e.g. business firms, sectors and institutions) and the role of government are presented and used.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse the processes, organisations and institutions that operate in the markets for capital and labour.
· Assess the appropriate role of government in a market economy.
· Identify circumstances in which the market system may be unable to allocate resources efficiently and identify and evaluate possible solutions to these issues.
· Read and analyse business, finance and economic issues in the media.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (Assignment 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3909 The Business Organisation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Niamh Lenihan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop and practise the theoretical and empirical economic method of reasoning as applied to organisation for business.

Module Content: The 'firm' as a social institution for coping with uncertainty is explored through various conceptual and analytical models, with the emphasis on the economics of strategy for competitive advantage in domestic and international markets, and the economic incentives and disincentives of, for example, different organisational structures, alternative modes of business governance and resource allocation mechanisms, especially capital auctioning and capital rationing, are explored..

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the conceptual frameworks and theories underpinning fIrm size and growth.
· Explain how firms deal with uncertainty.
· Use economic theory and analysis to examine human resource questions.
· Explain, compare and contrast business practices in business organisation.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (Written Assignment 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3911 Economics Reading Workshops 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100 (None).

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide students with the tools for reading, analysing and critiquing leading economic and business writers on market economies. Students will learn how to critically read economic literature and construct economic arguments through English.

Module Content: This module will introduce students to the leading Western economic and business writers on the market economy, through guided reading workshops. Students will assess the readings and critically analyse the important ideas and arguments in an interactive environment.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate how economic and business concepts such as inbound logistics, inventory management, and sales and marketing interact with each other to generate a business' sustained competitive advantage.
· Work in teams, apply organisational and decision making skills to address business issues and describe the entrepreneurial and leadership capabilities required for successful business.
· Apply economic and financial tools of analysis to describe and evaluate business operations and performance.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Individual Projects 80 marks; Workshop Participation 20 marks.).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3912 Economics Reading Workshops 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To further develop students' abilities in reading, analysing and critiquing leading Western economic and business writers on market economies.

Module Content: Students will build on and focus in more depth on theories and concepts raised in other programme modules. Students will assess the readings and critically analyse the important ideas and arguments in an interactive environment. Students will also discuss and critique, in workshops, current and topical economic issues.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate how economic and business concepts are applied to current and topical issues to gain greater clarity and understanding of those issues.
· Evaluate the economic arguments in public discourse.
· Present, in a professional way, their views and arguments on a specific topic in the market economy.
· Apply economic and financial tools of analysis to describe and evaluate business issues.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x Individual Projects 80 marks; Workshop Participation 20 marks.).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3913 Business Cycles and Development

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Marie O'Connor, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the importance of resources in both business and financial markets from a macroeconomic perspective.

Module Content: Business cycle theory, economic indicators used to understand business cycles, stabilisation policy and the role of government are discussed. The role of the central bank, monetary policy instruments and the factors that influence money demand are explored.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Discuss business cycle theory and how it can be used to explain macroeconomic fluctuations.
· Explain what indicators are used to study business cycles.
· Explore potential solutions to business cycle volatility.
· Explain the factors that influence money demand.
· Analyse the role of monetary policy in the economy.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (2 x In-class Tests 20 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC3914 Market Economy and Government

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Marie O'Connor, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the importance of resources in both business and financial markets from a macroeconomic perspective.

Module Content: Measures of national and regional economic performance and social progress are discussed. The difference between economic growth and economic development are explored in relation to living standards, income inequality and human development. The role of government and policy in influencing economic performance and social progress is addressed.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain how national income is measured.
· Interpret national income statistics and explain their implications for economic performance and social progress.
· Explain the difference between economic growth and economic development.
· Analyse the different measures of economic development and social progress.
· Discuss and evaluate alternative performance measures for economic policy of government.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (Written Assignment 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3915 Economic Research

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Aileen Murphy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The objective of this module is to develop skills for conducting business and financial economic research.

Module Content: This module will provide instruction on research question formation and conducting research in Business and Financial Economics. It will provide an opportunity for students to reflect on the practical problems encountered in the research process.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Design a viable research question for the development of a research project.
· Identify appropriate methods and techniques for answering the research question.
· Use economic theories and concepts to think about a research question in Economics.
· Develop theoretical frameworks and hypotheses in order to investigate a research problem.
· Identify relevant data for answering a research question.
· Communicate the research question to their peers, an academic audience and to a non-expert audience.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Individual Project 75 marks; Written Assignment 25 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3916 Survey Design and Sampling

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Aileen Murphy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To acquire the skills and techniques for data collection and analysis required for economic analysis of business organisations and financial institutions.

Module Content: This module will provide instruction in the main data collection techniques used in Business and Financial Economics. It will provide an opportunity for students to design, distribute an original survey and provide them with the opportunity to reflect on the practical problems encountered in the research process.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the main quantitative and qualitative techniques used in Business and Financial Economics.
· Describe the various aspects involved in the creation and implementation of a quantitative economic survey.
· Evaluate survey questionnaires in terms of layout, question sequence and question and response format.
· Design and distribute a high quality survey.
· Collect data using an original survey.
· Solve the problems of survey research, such as questionnaire validity and reliability, and non-response.
· Use computer software to present, organize and analyse economic data.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (IWritten Assignment 40 marks, Presentation 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3917 Individual Economic Decision-Making

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Huiyuan Yao, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide an introduction to the principles of individual decision making. To understand the role of incentives and to identify what incentives individuals react to. To study and analyse the theoretical frameworks employed to evaluate individual decision making in the market economy. To examine the effect risk and uncertainty have on individual decision making.

Module Content: The motivations for human action will be explored. The role of incentives will be explored. Students will be introduced to theories/frameworks of decision making from the neoclassical school of thought and from the Austrian school of thought. The nature of risk and uncertainty and its effect on individual decision making will be examined. The assumptions of human rationality, self-interest and utility maximisation will be explored.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify what type of incentives individuals react to.
· Distinguish between risk and uncertainty.
· Explain the motivations behind personal decision-making.
· Explain the economic concept of rationality and why people may not act rationally.
· Identify and evaluate desired outcomes of the individual and how they are achieved in the presence of uncertainty.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (In-class Tests 50 marks; Written Assignment 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC3918 Organisational Economic Decision-Making

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Huiyuan Yao, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To study the types of incentives firms act and react to. To identify the impact incentives have on groups on the design of market and non-market institutions and of the organisation of the firm as a social institution.

Module Content: Introduction to the role of the entrepreneur and the firm in the market economy. Explore why the firm as an organisation exists. Explore how the firm allocates resources. Examine how the firm deals with risk and uncertainty. Students will be introduced to game theory using the firm as a unit of analysis. Understand why some firms are small and why some firms are large and how firms grow.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse the different types of coordination and cooperation problems that society and organisations face;
· Assess the role of prices in the coordination of resource allocation in modern economies;
· Describe the basic concepts and tools of strategic interaction and be able to use these in examining choices;
· Identify and evaluate desired outcomes of the firm and the process of how the firm achieves these objectives when faced with risks and uncertainty;
· Explain business strategic decision making, using game theoretical approaches;
· Explain theoretical and conceptual frameworks for firms;
· Identify and evaluate desired outcomes of the firm and the process of how the firm achieves these objectives when faced with risks and uncertainty.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Written Assignment 50 marks; In-class exam 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4000 Economic Foundations 1

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semester 3.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 5 x 1day(s) Workshops.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the economic method of thinking and analysis through practical application of key ideas and theories.

Module Content: - Introduction to market economy
- Market analysis: demand & supply
- Demand analysis: Consumers and customers
- Supply analysis: cost structure
- Prices and quality rationing
- Organisation in the economic system

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain how the market economy works as a discovery process in the search for efficient allocation of resources in the health care.
· Examine the processes of economic decision making for individuals and business.
· Assess the role of government in the market economy.
· Describe and distinguish between the main economic accounts and indicators.
· Identify economic relationships between economic actors and factors governing them.
· Critically evaluate and assess economic arguments about critical issues.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 120 marks (1 x 5000 word assignment); Oral Assessment 80 marks (40 marks class participation and contribution, 40 marks presentation of assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment; Oral Examination.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination.

[Top of page]

EC4001 Economic Foundations 2

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semester 3.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 5 x 1day(s) Workshops.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explain how the interaction of decisons by consumers, firms and government affect the employment and allocation of resources and the distribution of income and goods within the economic system.

Module Content: - Criteria and process for individual decision making
- Business and organisational decision making
- Interaction of businesses in the market system
- Government in the market economy
- Market failure and government failure

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse the theoretical background to predictions of consumer, firm and government behaviour and decision-making.
· Recognise the issues involved in the different types of coordination and cooperation problems that a society faces.
· Assess the role of prices in resource allocation in modern economies.
· Demonstrate the implications of choice under uncertainty and information asymmetry.
· Analyse how and why markets fail to achieve competitive outcomes.
· Evaluate policy responses by governments in response to market failure.
· Demonstrate a capacity to consider value and appreciate the role of critical thinking in economics.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 120 marks (1 x 5,000 word assignment); Oral Assessment 80 marks (40 marks class participation and contribution, 40 marks presentation of assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment; Oral Examination.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination.

[Top of page]

EC4171 Economic Integration in Europe

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr Daniel Blackshields, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To use economic theory to aid understanding of European Integration.

Module Content: Rationale for progressive integration since the Treaty of Rome. Examination of the effect of European integration on monetary policy including the European Central Bank. Structural funds and Regional Aid. Environmental policy.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the nature of economic integration.
· Apply the principles of economic integration to European integration.
· Describe the European internal market.
· Show how the European internal market developed.
· Evaluate the evolution of Common Policies in the EU.
· Assess the importance and consequences of intergovernmental co-operation and expansion.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x Project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4206 Incentives in Firms

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To analyse issues of economic organisation emphasing incentives within firms.

Module Content: Incentives in labour markets, covering pay and performance measurement. Agency issues in alternative sources of capital.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Use agency models to evaluate alternative modes of raising capital;
· Analyse the effects of alternative incentive pay systems on profits;
· Describe the interactions between capital and labour market agency problems;
· Appreciate the importance of measurement costs;
· Recognise the role of technology in the structure of pay incentives.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4207 Firm Organisation and Behaviour

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To analyse economic organisation and practices of firms.

Module Content: Organisational issues such as outsourcing and vertical integration and the many hybrid forms. Marketing issues including commitment and pricing, especially auctions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse the trade-offs between purchasing functions and purchasing inputs to create functions;
· Recognise the importance of contracting costs in firm organisation;
· Appreciate the range of hybrid organisation betweem outsourcing and vertical integration;
· Use signalling models of costly information transfer to assess practices such as advertising;
· Analyse bidder strategies to evaluate auctions as a pricing mechanism.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4209 Government and the Macroeconomy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine the design, implementation and impact of government actions in the economy at the macroeconomic level.

Module Content: The goals of macroeconomic policy. The approaches used to measure living standards, unemployment and inflation. Fiscal, monetary and real constraints on macroeconomic policy. The long-run performance of the Irish economy. The Irish experience with self-sufficiency, stabilisation and supply-side economic policies. The EU influence on Irish economic policy. Recent developments in the Irish economy.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the goals of macroeconomic policy;
· Outline in detail how the goals of macroeconomic policy are measured;
· Explain the difference between, and the effect of, real, fiscal and monetary constraints on macroeconomic policy;
· Identify the role macroeconomic policies have played in the long-run performance of the Irish economy;
· Outline the influence the EU treaties and regulations have on member states macroeconomic policies;
· Analyse economic data releases.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4210 Government and Business

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Seamus Coffey, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine the relationships between government actions and business decisions.

Module Content: Inter-relationships between government and business. Influence of the government on the economic determinants of competitive advantage of a country or region as a location for business. The public policy process and the formulation of policy towards business.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify the role of government and other bodies in the regulation of the economy at both micro and macro level;
· Analyse the interdependencies between economic performance and government decisions and examine the relationships between government actions and business decisions;
· Outline how the government influences the economy of Ireland from a number of perspectives and in a number of key sectors including health and education;
· Compare the relative advantages and disadvantages of government provision versus private provision of goods and services in different sectors
· Discuss the role of government in solving market failures, for example, the problem of asymmetric information in the market for health care;
· Analyse the impact of sales and corporation taxes on market outcomes and business decisions.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4211 Economics of the Labour Market

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The aim of this module is to provide students with a good understanding of one of the most challenging areas in economic life - the labour market.

Module Content: The economic environment, in which important decisions are made by firms about hiring workers, and by individuals about supplying their labour, is examined. The module addresses the following key questions: what factors determine the amount of hours an individual wishes to work? How do changes in tax rates and tax bands affect that decision? What determines the number of workers that a company hires? How do Government policies impact on these decisions? How much education and training is optimal to the firm and to the individual?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the basic theoretical models of labour economics and how these can be applied to policy issues;
· Manipulate these models, and be able to analytically solve problems relating to labour markets;
· Apply the models to important policy areas whilst being aware of the limitations of the theory.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4212 Economics of Human Resources

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 300.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To analyse the use of economic theory in the field of human resources.

Module Content: Organisations must make important decisions regarding hiring, retaining, motivating and utilising their employees more effectively to gain competitive advantage, particularly in a challenging business climate. This module offers insight into how these decisions are made.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop a practical and theoretical insight into current practices and contemporary developments in human resource economics;
· Discuss the importance of human resources as a source of competitive advantage to companies;
· Identify and analyse key human resource issues, including the recruitment and selection of staff, their training and development, and the manner in which their work performance can be assessed and rewarded in the context of both large and small organisations;
· Demonstrate a good understanding of current issues in Irish and European labour markets.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4213 Law and Economics of EU Competition Policy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine competition law from a legal and economic perspective.

Module Content: The policy, business context law, institutions, techniques and efficiency of Irish and EU competition law.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Apply the more important Articles of the EC Treaty for Competition Law
· Collect economic data relating to Competition Law
· Analyse Competition Law with other EU policies such as cultural policy
· Compare and contrast alternative economic views on competition.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4214 Law and Economics of Competition & Regulation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr John Considine, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine competition law from a legal and economic perspective.

Module Content: An examination of market regulation from an economic competition perspective.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Evaluate the economic case for regulation of particular sectors
· Determine the role for public regulation of the private sector
· Collect economic data relating to regulation
· Compare and contrast alternative economic views on competition & regulation.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4215 Business Econometrics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 10.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 4 x 1hr(s) Tutorials; 4 x 1hr(s) Practicals.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The presentation of the theory and practice of econometrics at an introductory level and to create an awareness of the limitations of different forecasting techniques. The course is also designed to consider the use of economic environment of business.

Module Content: Review of mathematical and statistical tools and techniques; the nature and methodology of econometric modelling and forecasting; causal or explanatory modelling techniques (in particular, this section deals with the Two Variable Regression Model and the Multiple Regression Model); other topics include, dummy variables, functional forms and statistical testing etc.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Formulate, estimate, test and interpret suitable models for the empirical study of economic phenomena;
· Recognise why empirical analysis of economic relationships requires specific methods and why an econometrician needs a far larger tool-box than classical regression analysis;
· Develop the ability to evaluate the performance of alternative econometric models through the appropriate use of tests.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 100 marks.

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): None.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015.

[Top of page]

EC4216 Business Econometrics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC4215

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 4 x 1hr(s) Tutorials; 4 x 1hr(s) Practicals.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The course will provide a base of understanding for students when conducting econometric research. Emphasis will be placed on what econometric methods to use in different circumstances and how to interpret and appraise the results of empirical analysis. These skills may be enhanced by further econometric courses.

Module Content: Topics include: Multicollinearity; Heteroscedasticity; Autocorrelation; Lagged structures; Simultaneous equations and Identification.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Have a knowledge of the basic principles of econometric analysis;
· Analyse both the fundamental techniques and wide array of applications involving linear regression estimation;
· Acquire an ability to evaluate the performance of alternative econometric models through the appropriate use of tests;
· Describe the assumptions that underpin the classical regression model;
· Apply regression analysis to real-world economic examples and data sets for hypothesis testing and prediction; and
· Recognise and make adjustments for a number of common regression problems.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks ( 1 x Project 1,500 words).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4217 International Financial Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide students with a thorough foundation in the principles of financial economics and to develop a critical approach to the discipline.

Module Content: This module examines the risk-return relationship with different risk measures. Students will develop an understanding of portfolio diversification leading to the development of the Capital Asset Pricing Model as well as an investigation of the arbitrage pricing theory. Students will also explore recent developments in behavioural finance.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe and use fundamental principles and concepts in financial economics;
· Appraise the relationship between risk and return;
· Outline various theories of rick-factor pricing, such as the Captial Asset pricing Model (CAPM) and the Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT);
· Derive efficient frontiers and find optimal portfolios with the mean-variance portfolio and derive equilibrium relationships for expected rates of return.
· Critically assess financial theories and models.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word portfolio).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4218 Macro Finance in a Globalised Economy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide students with a global macroeconomic picture of financial markets. We examine how theoretical and empirical knowledge of macroeconomics and financial markets provides ways to analyse the salient problems face by modern macroeconomic policy makers.

Module Content: This module examines the relationships between macroeconomics and the world of finance paying attention to the relationship between saving, investments, fiscal policy, monetary policy and financial markets, The module also explores the relationship between marcoeconomics, financial markets and financial crisis.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Outline and discuss the connection between financial markets, real saving by households, and real investment by firms;
· Explain the relationships between fiscal policy and financial markets;
· Explain the relationships between monetary policy and financial markets;
· Interpret important global developments and financial news;
· Use theory and evidence to analyse actual problems facing macroeconomic policy makers.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word portfolio).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4219 Economics of Corporate Strategy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Formulation of strategic business decisions using economic theory and business cases.

Module Content: Business objectives and organisations. Added value, competitive positioning, sources of competitive advantage. Capabilities and resource based view of firm growth. Economies of scale and scope, vertical integration, diversification, mergers & acquisitions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Define strategy at various levels and identify strategic issues by evaluating strategic options and developing plans of action;
· Explain and apply tools for analysis of environment, market and firm;
· Analyse key elements of the external environment in which the organisation operates;
· Analyse the organisation's internal resources and capabilities, and how this related to competitive advantage;
· Examine the various ways firms can grow through vertical and horizontal integration.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4220 Economics of Strategic Behaviour

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edward Shinnick, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Formulation of strategic business decisions using economic theory and business cases.

Module Content: Industry analysis, strategic behaviour by firms and strategic interactions under different market conditions. Entry and exit decisions. Role of strategic commitments, game theory and pricing behaviour. Demand analysis, market segmentation and the role of risk in decision making. Impact and role of government regulation impacting on firms' strategic decision making.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse and evaluate the strategic behaviour of firms;
· Critically evaluate entry and exit decisions;
· Assess the role of strategic committments and pricing behaviour in strategic behaviour;
· Critically evaluate the role government regulation impacts of strategic decision making.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x 1,500 word project).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC4224 Innovation and Technology

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This course aims to provide students with an understanding of the role of innovation and technology from the perspective of the economist. Students will gain a deeper appreciation of the role of complexity in modern economies and recognise the importance of innovation and technology in the process of wealth creation and economic growth. The module intends to equip students with knowledge of how innovation contributed to long run economic growth, providing students with an understanding of the theoretical frameworks that facilitate change.

Module Content: Students will gain a deeper appreciation of the role of complexity in modern economies and recognise the importance of innovation and technology in the process of wealth creation and economic growth. The module intends to equip students with knowledge of how innovation contributed to long run economic growth, providing students with an understanding of the theoretical frameworks that facilitate change.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· determine the sources of innovation.
· explore the role of innovation in economic development.
· identify the key technological developments influencing economic growth.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1x 1,500 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4225 Economics of Strategy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC4224

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Students are given an introduction to game theory, the only mathematical tool explicitly designed for the social sciences, and emphasis is placed on the growing importance of evolutionary game theory. Candidates will be introduced to the uses of game theory and its applications to socio-economic events.

Module Content: Students are given an introduction to game theory, the only mathematical tool explicitly designed for the social sciences, and emphasis is placed on the growing importance of evolutionary game theory. Candidates will be introduced to the uses of game theory and its applications to socio-economic events.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Evaluate the importance of game theory for strategic decisions
· Appreciate the emergence of game theory and its development
· Explore game-theoretic frameworks for socio-economic situations.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1x 1,500 word assigment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4301 Economics of Health Organisations

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 8 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Other (16 Groupwork/Presentations).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brendan McElroy, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop an understanding of the methods of economic reasoning in a health care context.

Module Content: Demand and Supply method of analysis. Economic factors affecting health status, funding mechanisms and social/private insurance schemes, organisation of health care provision will be considered. Cultural and Stakeholders analysis. The nurse and midwife as a resource manager.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate an understanding of the methodology used in economic reasoning
· Use economic theory to explain the relationship between demand, supply and markets
· Outline the role of incentives on the economics of health care organisatons
· Evaluate a variety of health care funding and delivery mechanisms
· Compare and contrast public and private insurance schemes
· Discuss the economics of health care organisations
· Evaluate the economic dimension of hospitals
· Conduct a simple stakeholder analysis.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Essay x 100 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 50%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4302 Health Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 10, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Ms Michele Barry, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the methods for understanding resource allocation, critically interpreting evaluation studies and assessing public policy proposals in terms of equity, efficiency and strategic effectiveness.

Module Content: Quality of life and public policy. Economic philosophies: foundations for concepts of quality of life. The rational choice paradigm: exposition and critique. Economic scarcity, opportunity costs and resource allocation. Measurement and evaluation criteria. The public policy process including moral hazard, the principal-agent problem and market/government failure.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Apply key elements of economic theory to health and health care
· Analyse the bahviour of doctors, patients and hospitals using economic theory
· Apply analytical techniques to analyse resource allocation decisions in health care
· Describe the key differences between alternative institutional and organisational arrangements for the provision and delivery of health care products and services
· Evaluate the efficiency and effectiveness of health care systems.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1x In Class Test).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4402 Economic Research Project

Credit Weighting: 15

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2. (S1 and S2).

No. of Students: Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 10 x 1hr(s) Workshops (Guided research and self directed study); Seminars.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr Justin Doran, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Justin Doran, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To prepare and present a research study using economic theory and techniques.

Module Content: Independent work on a research and/or development project.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify specific economics related issues which would be useful to research.
· Develop a research question.
· Locate and discuss recent literature in the thesis area including theory, methodology and empirical evidence, discussing the main issues surrounding the research question.
· Identify data sources.
· Process, summarise and describe the data relevant to the thesis question.
· Carry out appropriate analysis to address the research question.
· Present, describe and interpret findings.

Assessment: Total Marks 300: Continuous Assessment 300 marks (1 x 2,000 word Research Proposal, 60 marks; 2 x Presentations, 15 marks each; 1 x 10,000 word Research Project, 210 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment. Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as perscribed by Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4403 Economic Consulting

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2. (EC4403 is taught twice. Students take this module in a single semester, depending on which programme they are registered for.).

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Mr Don Walshe, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics; Mr Don Walshe, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop and practice the knowledge and skills required for using economic and financial analysis in carrying out consultancy projects.

Module Content: This module describes the consultancy process and the stages involved in conducting a consultancy project. It examines the skills required in managing a consultant/client relationship. Topics covered include acquiring consultancy projects, briefs and contracts; researching the client business areas; constructing consultancy reports; managing client relationships and a portfolio of clients; professional practice and personal values; ethical principles, dilemmas and conflicts of interest. Case Studies will be used extensively to provide practical experience of the issues.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Prepare and deliver a presentation in a professional manner.
· Explain how ethical decisions are made and apply ethical decision-making theories and models to their own actions.
· Assess the quality of arguments, identifying rhetoric and fallacies in arguments.
· Write a professional consultancy proposal document.
· Explain the knowledge and skills required for using economic and financial analysis in consultancy projects.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 1,000 word essays 40 marks each; Presentations 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment. Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director on or before the Student Consultation days).

[Top of page]

EC4904 Market Economy 5

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To apply advanced microeconomic theoretical framework/theories in a participant-centred learning environment to develop a practical understanding of the nature, role and operation of individual behaviour in the market economy.

Module Content: The advanced theory and practice of consumer behaviour in the market economy will be explored. The contributions of frameworks and theories from behavioural economics and neuro-economics in understanding individual behaviour will be examined.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and explain conceptual and theoretical frameworks used to analyse the decision making process of individuals in the market economy.
· Explain the implications of theories and frameworks from Behavioural Economics and Neuro-Economics in helping our understanding of individual behaviour.
· Identify and explain the benefits of theories and frameworks from behavioural economics and their application to public policy.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (Written Assignment 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4905 Market Economy 6

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The module will explore microeconomic theory from the perspective of the entrepreneur and the significance of the firm in the market economy. Perspectives and conclusions will be drawn from the application of modern microeconomic theory to the Chinese economy.

Module Content: The module will explore theories and frameworks relating to the importance of entrepreneurship in the market economy. The importance of the entrepreneur as a catalyst for innovation will be examined. Students will explore the sources of imperfect competition in the market economy.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Outline the role of the entrepreneur in the market economy.
· Explain the key microeconomic theories underlying firm behaviour in the market economy.
· Describe the role of entrepreneurship in transition economies.
· Explain the importance of innovation and competition for economic growth.
· Analyse the changing competitive environment in China.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (Written Assignment 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4906 Growth and Development in the Global Economy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Marie O'Connor, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To analyse theories of economic growth and development and understand why there are large differences in standards of living globally.

Module Content: Economic growth theories are discussed. The impact of state development, modernisation, institutions and institutional development are analysed.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and evaluate alternative frameworks and theories of economic growth and development.
· Explain why some countries are rich and why some are poor.
· Discuss what can be done to help bridge the gap between the rich and poor nations.
· Evaluate the role of institutions, geography and natural resources as determinants of economic growth.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (In class exam 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4907 Productivity and Competitiveness in the Global Economy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100 (None).

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Marie O'Connor, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore the sources of prosperity, productivity and competitiveness within economies.

Module Content: Productivity is discussed in relation to economic growth with an examination of the different ways in which to measure it. The impact of innovation and systems of innovation on national performance are explored. The link between national competitiveness and prosperity is analysed.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain what productivity is and how its related to living standards;
· Explain what innovation is and how it is measured;
· Assess how a nation's system of innovation impacts the level of innovation;
· Analyse countries' innovation performance using different measures;
· Identify the factors that contribute to national competitiveness;
· Explore why competitiveness is important for economic prosperity.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (In class exam 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4908 Economic Survey Data Analysis

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Aileen Murphy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To apply research and data analysis skills required in conducting business economic and financial surveys.

Module Content: Building on research undertaken in EC3905 this module further explores the principles and practice of survey data analysis for business and finance. Areas addressed include data coding and tidying, statistical techniques for data analysis, survey reporting and survey errors and ethics. Focus will be on providing a practical grounding in the preparation, conduct and reporting of surveys for business purposes.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Appropriately code, enter and tidy survey data.
· Use appropriate survey data analysis software such as Excel and SPSS
· Prespare survey date descriptive statistics.
· Conduct appropriate bivariate and multivaritate statistical technqiues.
· Generate survey data descriptive statistics for presentation to a professional business level.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x Written Reports 50 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC4909 Economics in Practice Showcase Business Event

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 1, Max 100.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Declan Jordan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Aileen Murphy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop interpretative, written communication, presentation, team-working and leadership skills.

Module Content: Building on research undertaken in EC3915, EC3916 and EC4908 this module is a performance of understanding by means of a research project and business event presentation. Students will demonstrate their ability to apply concepts and theories of the programme to analyse issues relevant to Irish and/or Chinese businesses.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate management skills by participating in a business event in which original research is presented.
· Complete a business research report on a business issue of concern to businesses operating in the Chinese market to a high professional standard.
· Present their own research at the business event.
· Prepare and design a poster presentation based on original research.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Written Report 60 marks; Presentation 20 marks; Poster Presentation 20 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5200 Principles for Economic Reasoning 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Seminars; Workshops; Practicals; Other (Blended on-line).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Introduces fundamental ideas, concepts and theories as they have been developed by the great thinkers of Economics with particular focus on explaining how individuals, firms and governments interact.

Module Content: This module contains essential microeconomic and macroeconomic theory necessary to understand the workings of an economic system. Taking a behavioural approach, this module explains how the microeconomic motives of individuals can lead to macroeconomic outcomes. Throughout the module an emphasis is placed on individual decision making and its affect at firm and governmental level.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify recurrent relationships that are present in an economic system which are a product of individual actions;
· Appreciate the economist's principles of decision making as a mechanism to discern how a society's resources are valued and distributed;
· Evaluate the role of specific agents in an economic system including consumers, firms and governments.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,500 word projects, (50 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5202 Principles for Economic Reasoning 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Seminars; Practicals; Workshops; Other (Blended Online).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Continuation of Principles of Economic Reasoning 1, in which the intellectual resources developed by the great economics thinkers are introduced, and participants will begin to develop individual portfolios of conceptual and theoretical tools of these thinkers to incorporate into their personal meaning making systems.

Module Content: This module takes the learning outcomes from Principles for Economic Reasoning 1 and seeks to apply them to economic case studies. Historical and current macro-economic events are studied in light of the relationships identified between individuals, firms and governments in Principles for Economic Reasoning 1

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Assess economic issues in light of the theoretical insights gained from Principles for Economic Reasoning 1;
· Gain a personal appreciation of the theoretical tools of the economist;
· Appreciate the application of economic reasoning in analysing contemporary business issues.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,500 word projects, (50 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5203 Economic Ways of Knowing 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Seminars; Workshops; Practicals; Other (Blended on-line).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Continues the explorations begun in Economic Ways of Knowing 1 and, on the basis of which, participants will further develop their personal transition pathways from the 'laboratory mindset' to the 'business mindset'.

Module Content: This module takes the learning outcomes from Economic Ways of Knowing 1 and seeks to apply them to economic case studies. Taking the works of famous economic theorists, alternate interpretations of an economic way of thinking will be explored.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Apply alternate ways of economic thinking that assess similar research questions;

· Distil how the key messages of social theories relate to the economic system;
· Use case studies to understand how economic thought differs from alternate social sciences.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 2,500 word project (50 marks); 1 presentation (50 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5204 Styles of Knowing 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Seminars; Workshops; Practicals; Other (Blended On-Line).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Participants will develop an understanding of meaning making systems in general and their current personal ways of making sense of their world though exploring different modes of reasoning and styles of knowing.

Module Content: This module introduces participants to some of the standard styles of knowing in social activities and scientific inquiry. Discussions will be organised around one central question: how are the methods of the human sciences the same or different from those of the natural sciences?

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Make distinctions and draw similarities between styles of knowing in the natural and social sciences;
· Gain an understanding of the standard methodological and theoretical differences that exist for alternate styles of knowing;
· Master the skills required to explore, critique and assess alternate levels of knowing.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 2,500 word project (50 marks), 1 x presentation (50 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5205 Styles of Knowing 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): EC5204

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Seminars; Practicals; Workshops; Other (Blended on-line).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Continues the explorations begun in Styles of Knowing 1 and, on the basis of which, participants will begin to construct a personal transition pathway from the 'laboratory mindset' to the 'business mindset'.

Module Content: The learning outcomes achieved in part 1 will be applied to case studies in which participants will consult socio-economic questions where the differences between the research approaches of the human and natural sciences are both clear and unclear. Alternate styles of knowing will be applied to similar cases with an emphasis placed on the methods of the human sciences, facilitating the emergence of the 'business mindset'

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop a personal business mindset as a tool to understand social research;
· Interpret how alternate mental models and epistemologies can be applied to socio-economic case studies;
· Outline how personal meaning-making applies to the business setting.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 2,500 word project, (50 marks), 1 x presentation (50 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5206 Economic Ways of Knowing 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures (and Workshops); Seminars; Workshops; Practicals; Other (Presentations, Blended Online).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Explores how economic reasoning about business, government and society is constructed through the different ways of knowing examined in Styles of Knowing 1 and 2 and how these modes of thinking relate to scientific and business meaning making systems.

Module Content: This module provides students with an introduction to a specific mode of economic reasoning. In particular focus is placed upon the evolution of economic thought through time and the ways and means great economic thinkers understood economic processes.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Gain an appreciation of alternate theoretical lenses as a means of understanding economic processes;
· Critically assess key writings in terms of essential components of economic theorising that are generally accepted by the discipline;
· Appreciate the key contentious issues and misunderstandings of thinking with only economic mental models in mind.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 2,500 word project (50 marks), 1 x presentation (50 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5207 The Economic System: Complexity and Change 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures (and Workshops); Seminars; Workshops; Practicals; Other (Blended Online).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To review several of the major social and economic transitions which have led to higher degrees of socio-economic complexity

Module Content: This module understands competition in the market economy as a discovery process. Governance institutions and the roles of norms, values and practices are all explored through key texts and society is appreciated as an evolutionary process.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify the key phases of transition in socio-economic development;
· Recognise the importance of institutions and governance within a social scheme;
· Appreciate the role of social theory in the context of modern economic growth.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,500 word projects (50 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5208 The Economic System: Complexity and Change 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): EC5207

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Workshops; Practicals; Other (Blended on-line).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To outline the major social and economic transitions that have led to higher degrees of complexity including the use of simulations, so participants can further develop their individual portfolios of conceptual and theoretical tools for incorporation into personal meaning making systems.

Module Content: This module further examines the formation of 'the economic system' by exploring how systems emerge and evolve with emphasis on the contributions of economic major thinkers. The ideas introduced in The Economic System: Complexity and Change 1, especially ideas related to viewing the economy as a complex adaptive system, are studied beside some of the latest approaches emerging from the human and natural sciences, including the use of simulations, to provide a method of understanding the way specific economies and their institutions change and develop.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Outline how simulation can help social scientists understand economic change;
· Appreciate the power of computational methods for modelling dynamic systems;
· Link historical and theoretical concepts to the modern methods of economists.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,500 word projects (50 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5209 Foundations for Business Practices 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures (and Workshops); Seminars; Workshops; Practicals; Other (Blended on-line).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The economic foundations of the primary activities and functions of business and the role of business in the economy and society are considered to provide participants with a comprehensive perspective on the nature and operation of the business economy.

Module Content: This module focuses on economic frameworks and data analysis with business functions and practices in mind. The module aims to develop an understanding of a range of issues that relate to the practicalities of business that will allow students transform quantitative scientific methods to a business environment.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Appreciate the functions of business practice and be able to identify the essential economic features that are central to a firms operations;
· Develop frameworks in order to investigate a business research problem;
· Describe and present economic data in various formats.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,500 word projects (50 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5210 Foundations for Business Practices 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): EC5209

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Seminars; Workshops; Practicals; Other (Blended online).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Students will develop their own 'business toolkit' based on their understandings of the nature and operation of the business economy that they will have formed from their work in the other modules of the Programme.

Module Content: Continuation of the key objectives in Foundations for Business Practices 1, showing how standard frameworks used in business are developed from economic analysis.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Augment their understanding frameworks assessed in Foundations for Business Practices 1 through personally working with economic data;
· Gain a deeper insight to the relationship and linkages between theoretical problem solving and data analysis for business;
· Perceive the most important functions of data for social researchers and organisations, through application and personal interaction.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,500 word projects (50 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5213 Immersion Experiences 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures; Seminars; Workshops; Practicals; Other (site visits).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Exposure to the principles and practices of business through live case studies.

Module Content: This module entails a blend of guided field visits and engagements with experienced practitioners.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Experience first hand, the relationship held between business theory and practice;
· Conceptualise the competitive environment through exposure to a business audience;
· Experience the proximities and disparities between business economics and practical application in a business environment.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x presentations (50 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC5214 Immersion Experiences 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures (Presentations, Seminars, Workshops, Practicals, Blended on-Line etc).

Module Co-ordinator: Mr David Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: In this module participants will formulate a personal agenda for professional development oriented towards business.

Module Content: This module will involve a Continuation of Immersion Experiences 1 with a focus on organising learning into a coherent approach to business and career progress. The focus in Immersion Experiences 2 is focussed on the participants personal career development in light of the experiences gleaned in Immersion Experiences 1

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Appreciate the importance of particular functions of an enterprise and there link to individual performance, in the context of personal career development;
· Realise the variety of stakeholders involved in business decision making, in the context of personal career development;
· Identify the key steps necessary to be fulfil the personal goals identified by participants, in the context of personal career development.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x presentations (50 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6001 Macroeconomics for Financial Markets

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module is designed to focus on the key macroeconomic issues facing institutions that participate in and regulate financial markets.

Module Content: A selection of key macroeconomics theories, models and techniques with particular relevance to financial markets. Topics include business cycles and economic growth, uncertainty, monetary policy, inflation and the labour market.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· describe the movement of economic and financial variables during a business cycle.
· ascertain the phase of the business cycle an economy is in.
· apply different models to explain the macroeconomic performance of particular economies.
· contrast the monetary policy actions of various Central Banks, using appropriate models.
· analyse the interconnections between asset, money, credit markets and the real economy.
· assess the effect of government, monetary and exchange rates policies on individual countries, the global economy and financial markets.
· determine the causes of economic fluctuations and economic growth.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x max 3,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6002 Financial Institutions and Money Markets

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The objective of this module is to study the role of money in the economy, the behaviour of interest rates and the challenges facing banks and other financial intermediaries.

Module Content: This module examines the role of money markets and banks in the economy. It explores the rationale for banks as financial institutions, their functions and the challenges facing banks in all aspects of their business. It focuses on understanding the types of risk facing banks and the management of this risk.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the rationale for the existence of banks (commercial and investment).
· Evaluate the explanations for the transformation of banking business.
· Measure banking performance.
· Debate policymaker's response to banking crises.
· Compare and contrast the principle money market instruments.
· Determine the reasons for variations in money market interest rates.
· Explain Central Bank intervention in the Money Market.
· Explain how banks measure and manage their Credit and Liquidity Risk.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x max 3,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6003 International Finance

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Don Walshe, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module will extend and deepen students' understanding of key issues relating to international finance in open economy contexts.

Module Content: This module studies arbitrage relationships in FOREX markets including CIP, UIP and PPP and looks at fundamental models of exchange rate determination.Building on open economy macroeconomic and asset-pricing models, this module is also focused on how economic policy and the behaviour of financial market participants impacts international capital flows, exchange rates and global investment returns.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Present an informed opinion on a range of topics in international finance
· Discuss open economy macroeconomic and international asset-pricing models
· Critically assess international economic policy and the behaviour of financial market participants
· Recognise the linkages between international capital flows, exchange rates and global investment returns.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x max 3,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6004 Regulation and Compliance in Capital Markets

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module introduces the key techniques and principles of best practice in effective regulation and compliance management.

Module Content: This module addresses a growing interest by regulators and fraud prevention authorities in the use of economics to analyse, detect and deter white collar crime. It covers the guiding principles behind financial regulation and the main differences between the roles and key legal aspects of different regulatory institutions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· explain the economic arguments for and against regulation.
· evaluate the importance of financial regulation.
· develop and express views about regulatory systems.
· demonstrate a critical appreciation of key issues in European and International regulatory initiatives and the challenges facing regulators of global financial firms and markets.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x max 3,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6005 Derivatives Securities

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module offers advanced training in derivatives markets and the valuation of derivatives.

Module Content: This module introduces the concepts and mathematical techniques in pricing derivatives including options, swaps, forwards and futures on underlying assets such as stocks, stock indices, currencies, debt instruments and commodities.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Discuss futures markets and the use of futures for hedging
· Describe trading strategies involving options
· Explain the concept of risk-neutral valuation
· Describe the properties of stock option prices
· Derive and apply models of derivatives pricing including options, swaps and futures.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x max 3,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6006 Treasury Risk Management

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module studies treasury risk management strategies.

Module Content: The theme focussed on in this module are the measurement and management of risks facing banks and corporations arising from volatility in financial markets, in particular in currency and interest rate markets. The module looks at the identification and quantification of risk and at strategies of risk management.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· employ techniques to efficiently manage a company's cash flows
· identify and quantify interest rate and exchange rate risk
· explain the workings of risk management derivatives
· structure interest rate and exchange rate risk management strategies around an economic outlook.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x max 3,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6009 Research Methods

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Workshops.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics; Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics; Mr Don Walshe, Department of Economics; Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics; Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics; Dr Siobhan Lucey, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module provides the necessary skills to enable students to design, conduct and present research in a chosen topic.

Module Content: This module includes (i) a report writing/economic consulting element, (ii) visiting speaker seminar series, (iii) research methods training and (iv) workshops on recent developments in financial research.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· identify research questions in financial economics
· locate and discuss recent literature in the research area including theory, methodology and empirical evidence, discussing the main issues surrounding the research question
· identify data sources and process, summarise and describe the data relevant to the dissertation question.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x assignment, 30 marks, max 3,000 words, 1 x assignment, 70 marks, max 3,000 words).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC6010 Dissertation in Financial Economics

Credit Weighting: 30

Semester(s): Semester 3. (The dissertation is completed over the summer period and marks are submitted to the Winter board.).

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Other (Supervision).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Siobhan Lucey, Department of Economics; Mr Don Walshe, Department of Economics; Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics; Dr Ella Kavanagh, Department of Economics; Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics; Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Application of skills and knowledge acquired in the MSc Financial Economics modules to a research dissertation

Module Content: max 8,000 word dissertation on a research topic in financial economics

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· outline a research question in financial economics
· search and collect financial data
· describe an approprtiate methodology for addressing a research question
· implement an appropriate statistical methodology to address a research question in finance
· present results
· interpret results
· write up research findings.

Assessment: Total Marks 600: Continuous Assessment 600 marks (1 x 8,000 word dissertation).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination.

[Top of page]

EC6013 Health Services Resourcing - Public Funding Mechanisms

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6014

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Conceptual and empirical methods for evaluating alternative public systems for resourcing and distributing health services.

Module Content: - Alternative funding methods for health care systems - tax, social insurance
- Role of the state in funding and delivering health care

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe alternative public funding methods for health care systems
· Analyse the role of government and social insurance funds in the funding of health care.
· Appraise the impact of alternative funding methods on health care delivery.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Essay 3,000 word assignments (80 marks) and 1 x Presentations (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6014 Health Services Resourcing - Private Funding Mechanisms

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6013

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Conceptual and empirical methods for evaluating alternative private systems for resourcing and distributing health services

Module Content: - Alternative private funding methods for health care systems ? private insurance, out of pocket payments.
- Role of the private sector in funding and delivering health care.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe alternative private funding methods for health care systems
· Analyse the role of incentives and risk in the behaviour of health care providers, payers and "patients".
· Appraise the impact of alternative funding methods on health care delivery.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Essay 3,000 word assignments (80 marks) and 1 x Presentations (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6015 Evaluating Health Outcomes 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6016

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Examination of the theoretical methods and practical issues in conducting cost analyses and economic evaluations of health technologies.

Module Content: Framework and skills for conducting economic evaluations, including Cost Minimisation Analysis, Cost Benefit Analysis, Cost Effectiveness Analysis and Cost Utility Analysis. Principles of conducting cost analyses (partial economic evaluation) of health technologies. Discounting techniques.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the role of economic evaluations in health care decision making.
· Differentiate between the different types of economic evaluations.
· Critically interpret economic evaluations to enhance decision making.
· Describe the framework for conducting economic evaluations
· Conduct cost analysis of economic evaluations using appropriate software.
· Apply discounting techniques.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,000 word assignments (40 marks each) and 1 x Presentations (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6016 Evaluating Health Outcomes 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6015

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Examination of the theoretical methods and practical issues in measuring and valuing health outcomes for economic evaluations will be measured and valued and in employing decision analytical modelling in evaluation of health technologies.

Module Content: Methods for measuring and valuing health outcomes for use in economic evaluations, which will include Cost Benefit Analysis, Cost Effectiveness Analysis and Cost Utility Analysis. This will include measuring and valuing health in natural units as well as Health-related quality of life. Students will be introduced to decision analytical modelling for economic evaluations of health technologies, which will include Decision Trees and Markov Models.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify appropriate health outcome measures for use in economic evaluations of health technologies.
· Apply health outcomes in sample economic evaluations of health technologies.
· Explain the rationale for employing decision analytical modelling in economic evaluations of health technologies.
· Construct decision analytical models for sample economic evaluations of health technologies, using appropriate software.
· Employ decision analytical models in empirical examples of economic evaluations of health technologies using appropriate software.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 2,000 word assignment (40 marks) and 1 x 2,000 word project (40 marks) and 1 x Presentation (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6017 Health Care Markets 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6018

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Comparative analysis of how resources are allocated in health care systems.

Module Content: - Resource allocation in a health care market.
- Resource allocation in a taxation based health care system.
- Alternative priority setting techniques, e.g. rationing

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse alternative organisational and market structures for the financing and delivery of health care
· Evaluate alternative resource allocation mechanisms and their impact on health care
· Apply resource allocation mechanisms to the health care sector.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 3,000 word assignment (80 marks) and 1 x presentation (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised Assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6018 Health Care Markets Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6017

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Comparative analysis of how resources are allocated in health care systems.

Module Content: - Rationing mechanisms in different health care systems
- Examination of different market structures in health care systems

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Examine the rationing process under different health care systems
· Identify how different market structures can alter demand for and supply of health care.
· Apply solutions to different problems identified in health care systems.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 3,000 word assignment (80 marks) and 1 x presentation (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised Assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6019 Research Skills and Methods for Health Economics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6027

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Formulation of a targeted health research question; to research published sources of information; to develop, use and apply the skills required for conducting health economic research.

Module Content: Development of a research question and literature review techniques.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse and critique health economic research
· Formulate clear research questions
· Identify where the research question lies in the context of existing literature.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Essay 3,000 word assignments (80 marks) and 1 x Presentations (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6020 Dissertation in Health Economics

Credit Weighting: 30

Semester(s): Semester 3.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Other (Supervison Meetings).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module aims to allow students to apply the skills and knowledge acquired in the MSc Health Economics modules to a research project. The ability to perform independent research on either primary or secondary data is a key learning outcome of the programme as a whole.

Module Content: Max 8,000 word Minor thesis on a research topic in health economics

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Complete a substantial research article;
· Self-direct individual research;
· Use concepts and theories developed in the programme to reach valid conclusions;
· Employ economic data and techniques of analysis to investigate a research question;
· Present research findings to a professional standard.

Assessment: Total Marks 600: Continuous Assessment 600 marks ((1 x 8,000 word Dissertation)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination.

[Top of page]

EC6027 Research Skills and Methods for Health Economics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6019

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Develop, use and apply the skills required for conducting health economic research; collect and analyse original data; write up a report.

Module Content: Data collection techniques; data analysis techniques; Report writing skills.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse and critique health economic research
· Employ appropriate data collection and data analysis techniques for the research question
· Write a research report
· Communicate the findings of a research question orally and in writing.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x Essay 3,000 word assignments (80 marks) and 1 x Presentations (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6028 Economic Decision Making in Health 1

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6029

Teaching Method(s): 48 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Economic principles for decision making in the financing, resource allocation, distribution and delivery of health care.

Module Content: - Theory of decision making under uncertainty
- Expected utility theory
- Ways in which people diverge from expected utility theory.
- Strategic decision-making in organisations

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify tools and techniques for economic decision making
· Describe how these tools and techniques are employed to make economic decisions.
· Apply economic decision making processes to issues in health economic practice.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (2 x 3,000 word assignments (80 marks each) and 2 x presentations (20 marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6029 Economic Decision Making in Health Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6028

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Economic principles for decision making in the financing, resource allocation, distribution and delivery of health care.

Module Content: - Self-interest, profit and non-profit motives
- Role of values and ethics in decision making.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Propose solutions to problems and issues in the health care sector using the framework of economic based decision making
· Evaluate alternative solutions to problems and issues in the health care sector and mak recommendations thereon.
· Evaluate the role of ethics and equity when examining solutions to health care problems.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 3,000 word assignment (80 marks) and 1 x presentation (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6030 Health Economics in Practice

Credit Weighting: 60

Semester(s): Semester 3. (Students will go on work placement from July to December & Write Report January to March).

No. of Students: Min 6, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 1 x 6month(s) Placements; 1 x 3month(s) Other (Report Writing).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Apply interpersonal, communication and critical reasoning skills to enhance personal and professional development, through a work placement.

Module Content: 6 month internship; learning logs; research report writing skills; presentation skills.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Apply interpersonal, communication and critical reasoning skills to enhance personal and professional development, through the work placement programme.
· Identify problems and issues in the health care sector in a working environment.
· Evaluate alternative solutions to these problems and issues and make recommendations thereon.
· Demonstrate written and oral communication skills through the completion of a report and presentation thereof.
· Reflect on and analyse the learning experience from the work placement.

Assessment: Total Marks 1200: Continuous Assessment 1200 marks (8,000 word report (960 marks), Learning Logs (120 marks) Presentation of Report (120 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination.

[Top of page]

EC6034 Innovation in Health Practice

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 25.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Brian Turner, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Analysis of innovation in health care practices, products and systems.

Module Content: Frameworks for analysing innovation and diffusion in health care products, practices and systems.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Distinguish between types of health care innovations
· Identify stages in innovation process
· Understand decision-making in the adoption of health care innovations.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 3,000 word assignment (80 marks) and 1 x presentation (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the School).

[Top of page]

EC6037 Health Care Economic Evaluation 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6038

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module provides an understanding of economic appraisal techniques and the methodological issues encountered in health care economic evaluations. Economic evaluations are essential for health businesses as they are a requirement for product/service reimbursement by state agencies.

Module Content: This module focuses on health care economic evaluation techniques. These techniques will be applied to health technologies, such as pharmaceuticals, diagnostic and surgical procedures. Methods examined include the framework for economic evaluation consisting of Cost-Minimisation Analysis, Cost-Utility Analysis, Cost-Effectiveness Analysis and Cost-Benefit Analysis. Principles of Cost Analysis and time preference (discounting) will be investigated. Current methodological and policy issues facing health businesses, including reimbursement decisions, in conducting economic evaluations of health care technologies will be examined.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe and explain the framework for economic evaluations;
· Describe approaches to economic costing;
· Analyse the normative issues involved in prioritising health care resources;
· Critically appraise economic evaluations published in the health care literature;
· Conduct cost analysis of health technology using appropriate techniques and software.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 1000 word assignment (20 marks), 1 x 1500 word assignment (30 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6038 Health Care Economic Evaluation 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6037

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module provides an understanding of theoretical techniques and methodological issues encountered by health businesses in measuring and valuing health outcomes and decision analytical modelling for use in health care economic evaluations. Economic evaluations are essential for health businesses as they are a requirement for product/service reimbursement by state agencies.

Module Content: This module focuses on measuring and valuing health outcomes and employing decision analytical modelling in economic evaluations of health care technologies by health businesses. These techniques will be applied to health technologies, such as pharmaceuticals, diagnostic and surgical procedures in various types of economic evaluations: Cost-Utility Analysis, Cost-Effectiveness Analysis and Cost-Benefit Analysis. Natural health units and Health-related quality of life will be measured and valued. Decision Analytical Models such as decision trees and Markov models will be studied.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe approaches to measuring and valuing health outcomes for different types of economic evaluations;
· Construct appropriate decision analytical models for empirical examples of health care technologies;
· Apply decision analytical models in empirical examples of economic evaluations of health care technologies using appropriate software.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2000 word assignments (40 marks each), 1 x presentation (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6039 Applied Health Survey Methods 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6040

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module focuses on the practical application of the survey approach to the design of research projects and the collection of survey data. In this module, students investigate problems in health care from a business perspective. This module will feed into EC6040 when students will analyse the survey data collected in EC6039.

Module Content: This module focuses on development of theoretical frameworks, sampling techniques, survey instrument design and implementation, issues in survey research and report preparation and presentation.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop theoretical frameworks and hypotheses in order to investigate a research problem;
· Apply the different sampling techniques used in economic survey design;
· Evaluate survey questionnaires in terms of layout, question sequence and question and response format;
· Construct and administer a survey instrument.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x 2,000 word assignments (40 marks each), 1 x Presentation (20 Marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6040 Applied Health Survey Methods 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6039

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module provides an understanding of survey data analysis. Survey data collected in EC6039 will be analysed in this module.

Module Content: This module focuses on coding and processing in SPSS, Data analysis including univariate, bivariate and multivariate techniques and report preparation and presentation.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe and present economic data;
· Display proficiency in the use of statistical software programs;
· Develop a statistical model to analyse a research question;
· Estimate and analyse survey data;
· Interpret and evaluate the results of parametric and non-parametric techniques;
· Communicate the results arising out of an application of a statistical technique.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 1,500 word assignment (30 marks), 1 x Presentation (20 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6041 Applied Health Econometrics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6042

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module focuses on introducing students to the theory and concepts of econometrics to be applied to health businesses. The classical linear regression model is introduced and the assumptions underlying it are explored.

Module Content: The methods are examined using datasets and the appropriate statistical software. The approach taken is applied with a focus on understanding techniques and interpreting results in quantitative economic research.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe and explain the theory underlying regression analysis;
· Develop and estimate a simple econometric model;
· Interpret the results from a regression;
· Analyse the suitability of the regression results by constructing and interpreting confidence intervals and performing hypothesis tests;
· Demonstrate the ability to implement econometric techniques using econometric packages and software.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (2 x 1,000 word assignments, 20 marks each, 1 x in-class exam, 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6042 Applied Health Econometrics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): EC6041

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module extends the classic linear regression module using limited dependent variable models. In this module, students design approaches to analysing health businesses using econometrics.

Module Content: This module focuses on the practical application of the econometric approach to the design of research projects and the estimation and interpretation of key relationships in health economics as one technique for empirical research for the minor thesis.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the different statistical models and econometric techniques that can be used in health economics;
· Choose the appropriate method based on the research question to be considered and the available data;
· Specify statistical hypotheses, perform analysis by using statistical software and;
· Evaluate the results and be able to present them in a style suitable for use in reports and articles.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (2 x 1,000 word assignments (20 marks each), 1 x in-class exam (10 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6043 Quantitative Techniques and Analysis Part 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 10, Max 30.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures (including computer laboratory sessions).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module aims to develop and apply the participants quantitative and analytical skills. Methods for data analysis include descriptive statistics and bivariate analysis which are applied using SPSS for Windows.

Module Content: 1. Introduction - Quantitative Techniques and Analysis
2. Introduction to SPSS for Windows
3. Descriptive statistcis and graphs in SPSS
4. Index numbers
5. Time Series Analysis

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Interpret and employ different quantitative techniques: in terms of problem definition as a means of solving existing relationships; and use as an exploratory tool.
· Identify the relationship between problem definition and the modelling process.
· Apply the statistical tools of analysis using SPSS.
· Report and analyse the results generated from the data.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x project worth 50 marks.).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6044 Quantitative Techniques and Analysis Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 10, Max 30.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Lectures (including computer laboratory sessions).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Ann Kirby, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module aims to develop and apply the participants quantitative and analytical skills. Methods for data analysis including bivariate analysis, multivariate analysis and factor analysis will be studied, and applied using SPSS for Windows.

Module Content: 1. Non-Parametric Statistics
2. Statistical techniques to explore relationships among variables
3. Correlation
4. Partial Correlation
5.Multiple Regression
6.Factor analysis

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Interpret and employ different quantitative techniques: in terms of problem definition as a means of solving existing relationships; and use as an exploratory tool.
· Identify the relationship between problem definition and the modelling process.
· Apply the statistical tools of analysis using SPSS.
· Report and analyse the results generated from the data.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x project worth 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6045 Asset Pricing

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module presents the theory and practice of asset pricing with particular emphasis on equities.

Module Content: This module examines models of asset returns as well as their empirical testing methods. It also examines issues around stock price predictability and market efficiency.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· derive optimal portfolios of assets
· explain the relationship between return and risk in models of asset returns
· critically appraise various return measures and return models as well as test these models empirically
· critically assess and test the efficient market hypothesis.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x max 3,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6046 Fund Management and Evaluation

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module presents the theory and practice of portfolio management and fund performance measurement.

Module Content: This module studies portfolio management with particular emphasis on return and risk evaluation. It introduces and applies linear factor models in evaluating fund performance in stock selection, market timing and persistence. This module also examines risk metrics including value at risk.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· evaluate risk adjusted fund performance
· interpret the economic as well as statistical significance of fund performance findings
· explain different aspects of fund performance including stock selection, market timing and persistence
· calculate various risk metrics.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x max 3,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6047 Fixed Income Securities

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The objective of this module is to develop an understanding of fixed income securities and their use in portfolio management so that the asset manager, the treasurer, the investment banker, the financial analyst and the trader will have the conceptual foundations for making intelligent assessments of application of the fixed income instruments.

Module Content: This module examines bond yields, the term structure of interest rates and yield curve analysis, price volatility for option free bonds, valuation of bonds with embedded options, duration, convexity and portfolio immunisation, mortgage backed and asset backed bonds, interest rate derivatrive instruments, bond portfolio management and performance.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· describe yield curve theory, which imposes distinctive challenges in today's fast changing fixed income market
· discuss recent developments in the theory and practice of bond portfolio management
· calculate the risk and return profile of fixed income securities and understand their role in risk management
· identify and apply the main tools of portfolio performance measurement
· identify and apply different trading strategies.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x in-class exam).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6048 Securities Valuation and Selection

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Geraldine Ryan, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The objective of this module is to ensure students acquire practical knowledge, skills and abilities in the valuation of equities within international financial markets.

Module Content: This module examines Risk Tolerance, Asset Allocation, Stock Valuation Models, and completes a Financial Analysis of a Firm.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· evaluate and appraise the principles of asset valuation, and apply these principles in a variety of situations.
· critically evaluate equity valuation techniques and understand in what circumstances it is appropriate to apply each model and also understand the assumptions and limitations inherent in each model.
· possess some of the skills and techniques required to read and understand research articles in Securities Valuation and Selection.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x assignment, max 3,00 words).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (As prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6050 Business Development and the Competitive Environment

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 8 x 2hr(s) Lectures; 8 x 2hr(s) Workshops; 8 x 2hr(s) Other ((Research Supervision)).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore and use concepts and theories to define and explain facets of business competitiveness within theories of economic development: to apply concepts and theories to case examples and use them in designing and conducting a research project posed by a problem sponsor.

Module Content: Microeconomics of Competitiveness incorporating analysis of Firms and Industries: Competition, Strategy and Location; Analysis of the Business Environment; Economic Strategy: Nations and Regions; Role of the Cluster Concept in within Economic Development. The module uses materials developed by the Institute of Strategy and Competitiveness at Harvard Business School (Director: Professor Michael Porter) and incorporates customised Irish research prepared by staff, Dept. of Economics affiliated with the Institute of Strategy and Competitiveness, Harvard Business School.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Offer detailed description of the key concepts and ideas to guide strategy and policy in business and policy contexts
· Use a solid grounding in key concepts and practical tools in the arena of competitiveness to sustain thinking and analysis
· Critique the cluster as a concept for thinking about competitiveness and as a policy tool for business development
· Anchor the practical tools applied in this programme within an understanding of the process of economic development in the knowledge economy
· Present research project to the problem sponsor - involving topic selection, developing a research-plan, implementing the plan, using theory to reach valid conclusions, reporting on research methods and outlining results to problem sponsor.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (1 x assignment 20 marks, 1 x assignment 130 marks, 1 x presentation 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated ((Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Department).).

[Top of page]

EC6051 Growth and Change

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 8 x 2hr(s) Lectures; 8 x 2hr(s) Workshops; 8 x 2hr(s) Other ((Research Supervision)).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore concepts and theories of growth and change; to use theory and skills to conduct an applied economic research project posed by a problem sponsor.

Module Content: Short and long-term analysis, including forecasting, of price, output, - income, consumption, investment; government, imports and exports at the national, regional, industry and market levels; using key theories of growth and change to formulate hypotheses;

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Offer detailed explanation of the key concepts, theories and skills to enlighten policymakers on the implications of economic change
· Use a solid grounding in the key concepts and practical tools in the area of growth and change to advise businesses on how to cope with and take advantage of change.
· Anchor the quantitative and qualitative research methodologies used within an understanding of growth and change in the modern economy
· Self-direct research in the area of growth and change to facilitate continuing professional development
· Present a research project to the problem sponsor - involving topic selection, developing and implementing a research-plan, using theory to reach valid conclusions, reporting on research methods and outlining results to the problem sponsor.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (1 x assignment 20 marks, 1 x assignment 130 marks, 1 x presentation 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated.

[Top of page]

EC6052 Innovation and Creativity

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 8 x 2hr(s) Lectures; 8 x 2hr(s) Workshops; 8 x 2hr(s) Other ((Research supervision)).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore, evaluate and use concepts and theories to analyse and explain business innovation and creativity in the context of the market process; to apply concepts and theories in undertaking and presenting professional-standard research on a topic related to business innovation posed by a problem sponsor.

Module Content: Economics of Knowledge Creation and Innovation; Definitions of Innovation; Measuring Innovation; Models of Business Innovation - Linear Model, Chain-Link Model; Agglomeration Economies; Localised Knowledge Spillovers; Innovation Systems; Analyse how Place-based policies influence the Creative Process.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the role of innovation as a source of change in a market economy
· Describe the process by which businesses develop product and process innovation
· Explain and assess the determinants of business-level innovation, both internal and external, and the links between innovation and competitiveness
· Describe the role of 'place' as a factor influencing business innovation, including urbanisation and localisation economies.
· Use appropriate theoretical concepts and frameworks and empirical evidence to critique regional, national and European policy on innovation
· Present professional standard research - involving topic selection, developing a research-plan, implementing the plan, using theory to reach valid conclusions, reporting on research methods and outlining results to problem sponsor.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (1 x assignment 20 marks, 1 x assignment 130 marks, 1 x presentation 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated ((Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Department)).

[Top of page]

EC6053 Research Methods

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures (and Workshops).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Exploration of aspects of economic research and research writing. Includes the preparation of a research proposal and preliminary report on a selected topic.

Module Content: Approaching research, argument analysis, writing skills, doing a research proposal, organizing research, accessing and preparing data, the methodology of research, journal club and research showcase; preparing for the research article

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop research proposals and literature reviews for research projects
· Develop a focussed research question
· Critically evaluate theories and methods used in empirical research
· Explain and justify the appropriate methodology for addressing specific research questions
· Write a research project to a high professional standard
· Describe the process of economic research and construct a research plan to answer a specific research question.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x contribution 15 marks, 1 x presentation 15 marks, 1 x assignment (2,000 words) 20 marks, 1 x assignment (5,000 words) 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated ((Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Department)).

[Top of page]

EC6054 Econometrics for Research

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 8 x 2hr(s) Lectures; 8 x 2hr(s) Workshops; 8 x 2hr(s) Practicals.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop student's research skills which are required for the execution of group and individual projects. To introduce the research technique of econometrics. The module is both theoretical and applied is so far as effective interpretation of results is impossible without an understanding of the underlying theory. The over-riding emphasis is on developing the skills needed to apply econometric techniques, understanding the issues that arise and taking appropriate action.

Module Content: Exploring a single variable over time - Data Presentation, Real versus nominal time series data, Levels versus growth rates, Average annual percentage change, Logs and growth rates, Moving Averages, Estimating Linear Trends using Regression. Exploring the relationship between two or more variables; interpreting estimates, modifying the model, correlation and causation, advanced techniques including panel and time series regression, regression with binary dependent variables.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explore the movements in a single variable over time
· Develop and estimate econometric models arising in group or individual projects
· Interpret econometric estimates
· Modify an econometric model where necessary
· Use more advanced further econometric techniques including panel and time series regression and regression with binary dependent variables.
· Display proficiency in the use of STATA as tool for applying econometric techniques into practice.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (1 x contribution 20 marks, 3 x assignments 60 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated ((Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribe by the Department)).

[Top of page]

EC6057 Dissertation in Economics

Credit Weighting: 30

Semester(s): Semester 3. ((the research dissertation is completed over the summer period and marks are submitted to the Winter Board).).

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Directed Study (Independent Supervised Research).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To apply the skills and knowledge developed in Part 1 of the programme to complete a substantial research article.

Module Content: Max 10,000 word dissertation on a research topic in the area of economic change.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Complete a substantial research article
· Self-direct individual research
· Use concepts and theories developed in the programme to reach valid conclusions
· Employ economic data and techniques of analysis to investigate a research question
· Present research findings to a professional standard, both orally and in writing.

Assessment: Total Marks 600: Continuous Assessment 600 marks (1 x dissertation 450 marks, 1 x presentation 150 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination.

[Top of page]

EC6058 Career Development Workshop

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures; Other (Seminars, Workshops, Presentations).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Exploration of aspects of adult and career development in order to enhance employability of graduates.

Module Content: Models of personal and professional adult development; Career development through portfolio of skills used by economists, including self-management, team working and communication skills. Development of reflective learning logs on personal and team development; Construction of career portfolios, including resume's and social media profiles; Practical skills of organizing and delivering presentations for a business/policy audience.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Self-reflect to facilitate on-going personal and professional mental development;
· Engage in career planning;
· Participate successfully in teams;
· Organise and deliver a professional presentations to academic, policy and business audiences.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Contribution 20 marks; Reflective learning reports 40 marks; Career Portfolio Presentation 40 marks.).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC6059 Economic Data Analysis for Research

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures (& Workshops).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To describe and present economic data to a high standard. To evaluate the nature and uses of different approaches to collecting quantitative and qualitative data, primary and secondary data, questionnaire and interview design. To describe data using tables, graphs and written commentaries for both written and oral presentations. To present data in a professional manner.

Module Content: Provides practical skills required for group and individual projects including understanding the key guiding concepts for data on competitiveness and innovation: Sourcing and descriptive statistical analysis of secondary data, such as National Accounts and the Global Competitiveness Report. Grounding in the preparation, conduct and reporting of interview and survey data, problems of survey data, problems such as questionnaire validity and reliability, and non-response, the sources of sampling and non-sampling error. Descriptive statistical analysis of primary and secondary data, including the generation and description of tables, figures and graphs for both written and oral presentations.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe and present primary and secondary data to a high professional standard.
· Understand the key sources used for the study of competitiveness and innovation.
· Explain the sources of sampling and non-sampling error in data;
· Organise professional presentations of data for businesses, policymakers and academic audiences.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Contribution 10 marks , 3 x 2,000 word assignments, 30 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribe by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC6061 Scenario Analysis for Creative Thinking

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 5.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 1hr(s) Workshops.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eoin O'Leary, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To explore the epistemological foundations of scenario analysis with a view to understanding how economists develop scenarios about the future.

Module Content: Explores how individuals form expectations about the future and examine the roles of knowledge, beliefs, visions and images. Investigates risk and uncertainty. Scenario planning as technique to develop an open mind and to stimulate creative thinking. Organization of effective teams for scenario planning. Develop scenarios that integrate trends and uncertainties into alternative futures.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Understand how individuals form expectations of the future
· Understand the boundaries of Knowledge
· Explain the nature of risk and uncertainty
· Develop scenarios in the areas of policy and/or business
· Understand the influence of strategic conversation, team dialogue and exploration in scenario planning.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (3 x assignment at 30 marks each, 1 x contribution 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC6062 Applied Econometrics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Meadhbh Sherman, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module first provides an accessible background to current econometric methods. It then concentrates on the application of these methods in economic research by providing experience of analysing data sets.

Module Content: Topics covered include regression analysis, OLS, hypothesis testing, specification.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· derive various optimal estimators of cross-sectional models and describe any assumptions underlying their derivation
· discuss consequences if assumptions don't hold and explain alternative estimation techniques
· model relationships between variables in financial economics
· estimate and interpret relevant parameters and tests statistics and carry out diagnostic tests.
· use econometrics software to apply the above techniques to data sets in financial economics.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x In class exam).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6063 Applied Time Series Analysis

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Niall O'Sullivan, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Siobhan Lucey, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module introduces time series methods in econometrics. It also deals with the application of these methods in economic research by providing experience of analysing data sets.

Module Content: Topics covered can include ARIMA models and Box-Jenkins methodology, Modelling the Variance: ARCH-GARCH models, Vector Autoregressive models (VAR), Non-stationarity and unit-root tests, Cointegration.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· derive various optimal estimators of time series models and describe any assumptions underlying their derivation
· discuss consequences if assumptions don't hold and explain alternative estimation techniques
· model relationships between time series variables in financial economics
· estimate and interpret relevant parameters and tests statistics and carry out diagnostic tests.
· use econometrics software to apply the above techniques to data sets in financial economics.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 70 marks; Continuous Assessment 30 marks (1 x assignment, max 3,000 words).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6064 Health Systems: Stakeholders and Interactions

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module examines the roles of the various stakeholders in a health system and how they interact to make up the system. Economic analysis will be used to assess the objectives of, and interactions between, stakeholders, including businesses (providers and purchasers) and consumers.

Module Content: The focus of this module will be on the roles of, and interactions between, the various stakeholders in a health system, with a focus on the Irish system. The themes will explore the trade-offs and dilemmas facing the participants and stakeholders in health care. These themes include efficiency, equity and incentives

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify the main stakeholders in a health system and their objectives;
· Detail the interactions between stakeholders;
· Evaluate the economic issues affecting different stakeholders in the face of limited resources, particularly in the context of the Irish health system.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 2,500 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6065 Current Issues in the Business of Health: Research Methods

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module examines current issues in health systems, with a particular emphasis on the Irish health system, taking the perspectives of different economic actors (businesses and consumers) within those systems. In doing so, it gives students the skills necessary to undertake economic research on health-related issues.

Module Content: The focus of this module will be on analysing issues in health systems, particularly the Irish system, and their implications for providers, payers and consumers. Research methods, including the identification of a research question incorporating a testable hypothesis, formulation of a literature review and the identification of data sources and appropriate methods, will be central to this module.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Demonstrate substantive knowledge of a range of key issues and problems currently confronting health care systems;
· Examine problems within these systems and current literature relating to these problems, and produce a testable hypothesis to investigate these problems;
· Identify relevant data that can be used to test the hypotheses and appropriate methods for analysing the data to test the hypotheses;
· Relate theoretical interpretations to 'practice', such that the specific developments can be placed in their theoretical context.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 x 1,500 word research proposal (30 marks), 1 x 2,500 word preliminary research report (50 marks), 1 x presentation (20 Marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6066 The Business of Health Care 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): none

Co-requisite(s): none

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module, along with EC6067, is at the core of the programme, and provides the conceptual, theoretical and empirical analysis for understanding the role and responsibilities of businesses in health care systems and their performance. This would include, for example, resourcing and provision of health care and associated products and services, decision-making criteria and processes relating to health, the structure of the health sector and the role of interest groups.

Module Content: This module uses health economic theory to examine the distinction between public, private and non-profit provision and financing in health care systems. It will analyse the supply of, and demand for, health and health services; production and cost of health services; and medical insurance. Current health care issues at a national and international level will be used to allow students to apply health economic theory.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Explain the nature of health as both a consumption and investment good, that is from the perspective of individuals' enjoyment of their health and investment in their future health;
· Distinguish between the supply of health care services and the financing of those services;
· Explain the features of medical insurance, including adverse selection, moral hazard, risk adjustment and risk selection.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 2,500 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6067 The Business of Health Care 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): none

Co-requisite(s): none

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Jane Bourke, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module, along with EC6066, is at the core of the MSc Health programme, and aims to apply economic principles and concepts to the analysis of health and health care decisions by businesses and consumers, and the impact on businesses and consumers of government policy decisions. This module will explore the key economic issues currently confronting health systems in a comparative framework.

Module Content: This module will build on EC6066 and examine issues such as equity, access and need; and the effect of government policies on businesses and consumers in the health system. Current health care issues at a national and international level will be used to allow students to apply health economic theory.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the structure and operation of health care systems and compare the performance of health systems in different countries from the perspectives of businesses, consumers and the wider economy;
· Analyse the equity of different systems of health care provision and utilisation;
· Appraise the effects of public policy decisions on businesses and consumers in health care systems.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 50 marks; Continuous Assessment 50 marks (1 x 2,500 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Revised assignment to be submitted as prescribed by the Lecturer(s)).

[Top of page]

EC6100 Industry, Market and Strategic Analysis Part 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Introduce the core theory and concepts/framework, setting the conceptual foundations for the programme.

Module Content: Theory and empirical frameworks employed in the analysis of firms, their operation and the market/industry context.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Recall the programmes conceptual framework/theory
· Explain, using examples, the key theories and frameworks
· Relate the conceptual framework and theories to other programme modules.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,000 word assignments).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6101 Industry, Market and Strategic Analysis Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Edel Walsh, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Build on the core theory and concepts/framework introduced in EC6100

Module Content: Theory and empirical frameworks employed in the analysis of firms, their operation and the market/industry context.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyze significant economic issues regarding the role of the firm's resources in performance and competitiveness.
· Investigate business issues and practices
· Assess business strategy, operation, activities, and environment
· Relate the conceptual framework to other programme modules.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,000 word assignments).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6102 Economic Survey Techniques for Business Research Part 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To use and apply the skills required for designing economic surveys in business.

Module Content: This is a practical module focused on the application of techniques in survey design to gather relevant economic data for business enterprises.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Design and construct a business economic survey
· Identify and explain types of market research used by business enterprises
· Prepare a report on questionnaire and research design.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks ((1 x Group Project 80 marks, Presentation, 20 marks).).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6103 Economic Survey Techniques for Business Research Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Noirin McCarthy, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To use and apply the skills required for conducting economic surveys in business.

Module Content: This is a practical module focused on the application of techniques in survey design and analysis to gather and analyse economic data for business enterprises

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Collect information/data essential for business decisions
· Analyse and interpret, in a practical way, business survey data using SPSS
· Report and present findings to a high professional standard.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks ((1 x Group Project 80 marks, Presentation, 20 marks).).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6104 Practice Laboratory in Business Part 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Directed Study (Guided independent study and directed practice workshops to facilitate systematic observation and integrative analysis of the operation of firms in the context of industry/market environment and competitive strategy).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide students with a foundation in understanding the workings of a business through a live simulated experience.

Module Content: On the basis of an underlying integrative framework for the programme, applied learning is conducted by the introduction to a live simulated competitive business environment.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Measure business performance using key indicators such as cash flow, asset accumulation and current liabilities.
· Justify the decision-making they undertake.
· Experiment with the organisation of business activities.
· Identify the activities of the value chain in the running of a business.
· Effectively price a product using the theory of the firm.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks ((In-class Exam, 50 marks; Simulation Exercises, 50 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6105 Practice Laboratory in Business Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Directed Study (Guided independent study and directed practice workshops to facilitate systematic observation and integrative analysis of the operation of firms in the context of industry/market environment and competitive strategy).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide students with a framework for enhancing foundation provided in EC6104 to develop independent, observational, analytical and integrative skills, through individual business simulation exercises.

Module Content: On the basis of an underlying integrative framework for the programme, applied learning is conducted through a critical reading-writing project based on a designated reading assignment amd conducting a business simulation exercise.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Differentiate between successful and unsuccessful business strategies in a competitive environment.
· Relate the difficulties of running a simulated business with real world enterprises.
· Justify the decision-making they undertake.
· Experience a competitive business environment.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks ((Individual Project, 50 marks; Simulation Exercises, 50 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6106 Resourcing for Entrepreneurship and Innovation Part 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Other (Lectures Presentations, Case Study Workshops and Practitioner).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Marie O'Connor, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To enable participants to identify the most effective and efficient modes of resourcing new, growing and established ventures for entrepreneurial and innovative processes.

Module Content: This module explores the resources necessary for entrepreneurship and innovation focusing specifically on the financial resource needs of entrepreneurs in evaluating a business opportunity. It explores the use of budgets and financial planning as a means of informing the decision making process of entrepreneurs at the earlier stages of the entrepreneurial process.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Understand the role of financial statements in a business.
· Explore the role of budgeting in a business.
· Evaluate the resource implications of a business opportunity.
· Construct and interpret the various economic accounts used by organisations.
· Construct and present the various economic accounts for a campus based business.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x In-class exam).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6107 Resourcing for Entrepreneurship and Innovation Part 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Other (Lectures Presentations, Case Study Workshops and Practitioner).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Ms Marie O'Connor, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To enable participants to identify the most effective and efficient modes of resourcing new, growing and established ventures for entrepreneurial and innovative processes.

Module Content: This course explores the resources necessary for entrepreneurship and innovation focusing specifically on the financial resource needs of entrepreneurs in exploiting a business opportunity. It adopts a practical approach in constructing, interpreting and analysing financial statements to monitor and improve business performance. Entrepreneurial learning is explored in a resource context.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse how financial statements can be used to monitor and explain firm performance.
· Explain how financial statements are utilised to make decisions in a campus based business.
· Explore the role of resources in a campus business.
· Discuss the learning involved in exploiting a business opportunity.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 80 marks; Continuous Assessment 20 marks (1 x 1,000 word assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6114 Field Work in Business Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: -.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Other ((Guided Practitioners' Colloquay; Video Media; Site-Visits)).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To bring participants in direct contact with the operation of businesses and to explore with practitioners their issues and practices through an applied economics perspective.

Module Content: Participant-centered discovery of business issues and linking of theory to practice.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Prepare for meetings with business people.
· Assess and evaluate practitioner's ideas and issues.
· Explain the activities of various businesses, grounded in theory.
· Discuss practices and strategy with the business community.
· Develop a more comprehensive understanding of how business operates.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (4 x 15 Fieldwork report/presentation and 1 x 40 interview).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6116 The Market Economy and Enterpreneuship

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semester 2. (Also delivered in Semester 1 due to the nature of tuition and assessment).

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Other.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Mr Owen O'Brien, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce participants to the activity of business in the market economy and the realities of business practice.

Module Content: A practice-orientated module in which participants will be guided through the issues and decision processes of business creation from product conception to market delivery by an established entrepreneur. The economics perspective will be used to examine practical examples of product conception and positioning, profitability and margin assessment, and channels to market in the context of contemporary economic and business thinking.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Outline the importance of innovation for the creation of business value
· Recognise the factors which contribute to innovation
· Use practical tools to assess innovation goals and outcomes
· Describe the importance and function of business in the world economy
· Think entrepreneurially, as a discipline
· Partake in the real business world.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (Innovation Project (Team), 100 marks; Series of structured assignments relating to business practice (Individual), 100 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6117 Reflective Journaling

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Directed Study.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To facilitate personal development through a series of reflective writing exercises relating to programme content.

Module Content: Participants use the programme organising framework and a designated reading as a foil to reflect on, integrate and deepen personal learning for all programme modules.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· 'See' how their own thinking is progressing over time, and how they are making their own contributions to what they think about issues
· Change their way of personal thinking
· Reflect on their work and continue in their personal and professional development and transformation
· Communicate personal development through a reflective process.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (4 x 15 reflective journals, 1 x 30 plenary presentation, 8 x 1.25 workshops).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6120 Business Practice and Live Case Analysis

Credit Weighting: 30

Semester(s): Semester 3. (Students will go on placement/work experience from July to December).

No. of Students: Max 25 (max).

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Placements (Work placement/work experience from July to December, and Workshops (4 x 3hrs).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Robert Butler, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module aims to enable participants to develop a more comprehensive understanding of how business operates through live research study.

Module Content: 'Live Case' analysis will occur via 6 months work placement/work experience. Company problem based research is supported through a series of research workshops developing reflective learning log, writing skills, presentation skills and research report writing skills.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Assess and evaluate practitioner's ideas and issues.
· Explain the activities of business, grounded in theory.
· Discuss practices and strategy with the business community.
· Apply business strategy and activities to a particular environment.
· Reflect on their work and continue in their personal development.
· Begin professional career development.
· Prepare for meetings with business people.

Assessment: Total Marks 600: Continuous Assessment 600 marks (Portfolio consisting of (1) Live Case Study Report based on work placement/work experience, 5,000 word max (300 marks), (2) Professional Development Learning Log (100 marks) and (3) Presentation to Plenary Forum - including placement company representatives - based on 'live case' (200 marks).).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40% In addition, students must achieve at least 40% in the Live Case Study Report. For students who do not satisfy this requirement a 'Fail Special Requirement' judgement will be returned along with the mark achieved.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination.

[Top of page]

EC6301 The Third Sector Economy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students: Min 15, Max 30.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 1hr(s) Lectures; 6 x 1hr(s) Seminars; 6 x 1hr(s) Workshops.

Module Co-ordinator: Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To examine the economic underpinnings, role, and outcomes of the social voluntary/not-for-profit sector.

Module Content: The applied theory of the third sector is developed and used to explore the operation of the third sector in relation to the business and government sectors of the economy including it's particular contribution to economic prosperity, social well being and the quality of society.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· To understand the increasing importance of NGOs as a social force and their financial importance. This will include the definitions, critical examinations of legal aspects include tax free designations, restrictions on their activities by governments, including analysis of changing attitudes
· Contd., towards them. Are they becoming too powerful, and are their activities entering areas beyond their original remit.?
· These are the area we will be critically examining to establish a balanced analysis and reach an informed opinion.
· Participants will be able to apply key concepts and theories to explain the structure, operation and performance of the third sector as an integral element of the economics system.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Group Research Project - 2500 words).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (by means of individual essay as prescribed by the Programme Director - approx 1,500 words).

[Top of page]

EC6504 Economic Foundations for Strategic Thinking

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1. (Semester 4, Year 2, MBA).

No. of Students: Min 10, Max 50.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Other (Lectures, Seminars, Workshops, Presentations).

Module Co-ordinator: Prof Connell Fanning, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module integrates the work of the first three modules and extends the analysis to the fundamental level of decision-making in business.

Module Content: The foundations in Economics to the analysis and practice of business strategy are explored and used to explore the nature of the economic business system, especially the market process and competition, as the setting for business decision-making.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· An integrated view of the business economy
· A coherent approach to thinking about the strategic issues in business.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (Essays Individual Professional Reflection Essay).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 5% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (Resubmit Essay as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6600 Econometrics: Theory and Applications 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To develop the basic concepts of regression analysis, providing a firm grounding in the theory of Ordinary Least Squares (OLS) and an appreciation of its limitations; to provide a theoretical understanding of the causes, consequences and detection of, and remedies for, the violation of the assumptions of the classical linear regression model; to illustrate the application of this theory within a range of economic contexts; to familiarise students with a dedicated statistical/econometric software package.

Module Content: The Classical Linear Regression Model: two-variable and multiple-variable regression analysis, model specification, estimation and evaluation. Violations of the Assumptions of the Classical Model: autocorrelation, heteroscedasticity, measurement error, multicollinearity, omitted variables, structural instability.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe and make use of basic econometric techniques both when the classical linear regression assumptions are satisfied and when they are not;
· Interpret, evaluate and explain regression results and test hypotheses;
· Estimate econometric relationships using relevant software.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 X In-class examination 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6601 Econometrics: Theory and Applications 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To further participants' knowledge of econometric theory and facilitate the preparation for economic research by examining a number of extensions to the classical linear regression model.

Module Content: Techniques covered include Qualitative choice modelling, Panel Data Analysis, Seemingly Unrelated Regressions, Macroeconomics Time Series Analysis, Financial Time Series Analysis, Instrumental Variables.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the theoretical background to a range of different econometric models.
· Estimate cross sectional, panel and time series econometric models using relevant software.
· Carry out an applied econometric research project which would include the interpretation and evaluation of econometric results and hypothesis tests.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 x 2,000 word project 40 marks;).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6602 Contemporary Economic Debates and Ideas

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 6 x 2hr(s) Workshops; 6 x 2hr(s) Other (Directed Study).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide students with an opportunity to read, discuss and present their views on important topics in contemporary economic debate.

Module Content: Students will immerse themselves in contemporary debate using a variety of readings and presentations. The centre piece of the reading will be a canonical book on the issue.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Perform a close reading of an important book
· Locate these arguments in the wider history of ideas in economics
· Present arguments for alternative positions in the debate.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 X 2,500 word Essay (50 Marks each)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6603 Current Research Seminars

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 6 x 2hr(s) Workshops; 6 x 2hr(s) Other (Directed Study).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide students with an understanding of selected topics in contemporary economic debate.

Module Content: This module will consist in a detailed critical analysis of selected topics in contemporary economic debate using economic theory and empirical evidence.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify the views and perspective on a contemporary issue taken by major contributors to that debate.
· Apply knowledge of these positions to particular examples and problems.
· Formulate and analyse key questions and arguments for the various positions and approaches.
· Present economic theory and evidence on a research issue.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 X 2,500 word Essay (50 marks); Presentation (50 marks)).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6604 Advanced Microeconomics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To enhance participants' knowledge of microeconomic theory and its role in understanding individual decision making.

Module Content: Key microeconomic theories and techniques used in applied research will be examined including models of individual choice and demand, choice under uncertainty and game theory and strategic thinking.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse the theoretical background to prediction of consumer, firm and government behaviour and decision-making.
· Describe and illustrate the effect of a change in an individual's welfare using uncompensated and compensated demand curves.
· Demonstrate the state-preference approach to choice under certainty.
· Evaluate the expected utility model in relation to other models of decision-making under certainty.
· Determine pure-strategy, mixed strategy and Bayesian Nash equilibrium solutions to a game.
· Describe the differences between analytical game theory and behavioural game theory.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 X In Class Examination 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6605 Advanced Microeconomics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To enhance participants' knowledge of microeconomic theory and its role in understanding the functioning of markets and instances of market failures.

Module Content: Key microeconomic theories and techniques used in applied research will be examined including examples of systematic departures from perfect rationality, models of imperfect competition, market failures arising from externalities, public goods and informational asymmetries.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Outline and contrast the development of behavioural economics vis-a-vis neoclassical economics.
· Summarise, interpret and evaluate evidence of systematic departures from perfect rationality.
· Provide analysis to explain how and why markets fail to achieve competitive outcomes.
· Evaluate policy responses by government which help to 'correct' the different types of market failure.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 X In Class Examination 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6606 Advanced Macroeconomics 1

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand the relationship between macroeconomic variables and economic growth using growth theory and applied research examples.

Module Content: Key macroeconomic theories and techniques used in applied research will be examined including the Solow Model, Infinite Horizon and overlapping Generation Models and Endogenous Growth Theory.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the factors that drive economic growth using economic growth models and using key issues such as investment, technology, innovation and knowledge.
· Interpret the implications of alternative growth theories for economic policy.
· Identify the impact of government policy and individual decisions on the growth path of an economy.
· Describe how macroeconomic theories can be used in applied research.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 X In Class Examination 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6607 Advanced Macroeconomics 2

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To understand the relationship between business, government and the macroeconomic environment and to examine the potential impact of government policy on economics fluctuations.

Module Content: A selection of key macroeconomics theories, models and techniques used in applied research will be examined. Selected methods will be applied to analysing national income, consumption, investment, government finances, and the traded sector.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the factors that drive economic fluctuations using economic models.
· Analyse the roles (using appropriate frameworks) played by governments and central banks, the banking sector, firms and households in causing and propagating recessions and booms.
· Evaluate the role of fiscal and monetary policies.
· Interpret a short to medium run macroeconomic equilibrium.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 X In-class examination 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Summer 2015.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6617 Professional Business Skills

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Lectures (Workshops and Seminars).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The aim of this module is to help develop participants' professional business skills and augment professional development with a view to enhancing employability and promotion prospects. Workshops and seminars are organised by the Programme Director at appropriate stages throughout each semester.

Module Content: Specific workshops that deal with particular skills are organised and include: essential business writing skills; data presentation and analysis skills; ethics and judgement. A key feature of the module is invited guest speakers from various organisations who will emphasise their experiences and the skills required in the business world. Guest speaker seminars will also expose participants to current business issues, problems and solutions.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Write short reports to a professional standard, including trends and statistical commentaries
· Communicate results of analyses quickly, precisely and credibly to senior leaders in business, government and other relevant stakeholders
· Develop a good understanding of some of the key skills required of business analysts in different organisations
· Engage in career planning
· Reflect on and manage their on-going professional development.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (2 Assignments, 100 Marks each. Assignment 1 in Semester 1. Assignment 2 in Semester 2.).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC6618 Business Economics Report (the BER)

Credit Weighting: 30

Semester(s): Semester 3.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Directed Study (Supervised Research).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module aims to provide experience of applied research focused on supporting business/strategic decision-making in a company, industry or country. The emphasis is on applying the skills and knowledge acquired in the MBS Business Economics modules to a business research project.

Module Content: Participants are required to write a research report on a business economics topic, maximum of 12,000 words. Participants select from a range of possible research themes and are then assigned to a supervised research group. Each group is assigned a research supervisor, co-ordinated by the Programme Director. The group meet at regular intervals with their supervisor to advance the research process.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Produce a business economics report focused on supporting business/strategic decision-making within a company, industry or country
· Present their report to a business audience
· Confidently undertake original applied research on a business issue.

Assessment: Total Marks 600: Continuous Assessment 600 marks (1 x 12,000 word Business Economic Report).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplemental Examination.

[Top of page]

EC6619 Scenario Planning for Strategic Decision-Making

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 6 x 4hr(s) Seminars (Workshops).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The module aims to develop a portfolio of techniques for students as decision-makers and to act as an enabling device for them to reflect on how they might use such techniques for the development of strategic and tactical conversations of individuals, teams and organisations.

Module Content: This module focuses on the development of humans' cognitive mechanisms for representing and making inferences about decisions that they must make. It explores how an entrepreneurial decison-maker can engage with the process of developing imaginative mental models that can instruct and advance decision-making to deal with strategic surprises. It focuses both on the use of scenario planning as a metacognitive tool to enable decision-makers to anticipate, recognise and prepare their mindsets to engage with worlds of complexity and volatility.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and specify appropriate techniques for the development of mental models for strategic and tactical decisions and actions
· Reflect on the appropriateness of specific techniques for the development of mental models for strategic and tactical decisions and actions
· Identify and interpret data using appropriate techniques for the development of mental models for strategic and tactical decisions and action
· Communicate the results of such analysis to a non-expert audience
· Reflect on the potential uses of various techniques for the development of mental models for students' Business Economics Report.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 group project, 50 marks; 1 individual assessment, 20 marks; reflective journals, 20 marks; 1 individual presentaton, 10 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment (1 Group project, 50 marks; 1 individual assessment, 20 marks; reflective journals, 20 marks, 1 individual presentation, 10 marks).

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6620 Research Methods for Business Economics

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures (and Workshops).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Research skills are developed to enable students to design, conduct and present research in a chosen topic.

Module Content: The module analyses the main elements of the research process including:
the nature of the research questions; the need for an underlying economic theory or framework; data collection and analysis; and the preparation and delivery of preliminary research reports.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and formulate research questions
· Locate and discuss recent literature in the research area
· Identify data sources and process, summarise and describe the data relevant to the research question
· Discuss and explain the use of various techniques in research.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 Assignments at 50 marks each. Both assignments are individual assignments. The first assignment is the research proposal and the second assignment is the literature review and methodology).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Department).

[Top of page]

EC6621 Economics of Business Strategy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Seminars (Workshops).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module introduces the core theories and frameworks of business strategy and acts as the intergrating module for the overall programme.

Module Content: The economic foundations of the main frameworks used in strategic formulation and analysis are explored as a basis for learning how to use these frameworks most effectively. These include the analysis of value creation within organisations, competitive advantage and business performance, and the importance of strategic interaction among firms.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· explain various approaches to understanding competitive advantage and business performance
· evaluate the relative merits of different approaches for identifying the sources of business success and failure
· analyse key factors impacting on business performances in Ireland and globally
· write business environment reports to a professional standard.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 x assignment).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) (as prescribed by the Department) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6622 Business Relationships and Business Strategy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Seminars (Workshops).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The module aims to introduce students to methods of understanding competitive dynamics: the interactive nature of players in the market, including stakeholders such as government. The course material and case studies take a broad cross-sectoral and international approach, as concepts and frameworks are generic and applicable across all sectors and boundaries.

Module Content: Business relationships are explored, including cooperation and conflict. The importance of flexibility vs commitment in strategic decision-making is also examined.
Key issues and concerns of small businesses are also examined, including access to finance, availability of suitable investment opportunities, and managerial capacity. Some cases will be based in the Irish context, while others have a broader trans-national focus.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· analyse the nature of business relationships
· explain the value of firm flexibility in conditions of uncertainty
· assess the importance of game theory for understanding strategic interactive decision-making
· outline factors which influence small firm survival and growth
· discuss some of the current issues facing small firms (e.g. access to finance etc.).

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 x individual assignments).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6623 Analysing General Business Conditions

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module provides the opportunity to acquire an understanding of the macroeconomic environment and other methods for analysing business conditions that impact on firm profitability, competitiveness, and attractiveness of locations (regions/countries). Particular attention is paid to measuring growth as well as the theory behind sustainable growth and innovating to sustain competitive advantage.

Module Content: Specific issues examined in this module include productivity, innovation, growth, and competitiveness through a combination of case studies and applied project work.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Display an appreciation of the fundamentals of economic growth and growth accounting
· Develop an understanding of why concepts of sustainable growth and competitiveness are important for strategic decision making in a business environment
· Appreciate the complexity of the relationship between finance and the real economy and, in particular, the link between sustainable growth and financial stability
· Demonstrate transferable skills through written coursework, presentations and workshops.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 Assignment, 40 Marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6624 Macroeconomic Data Analysis for Strategic Decision-Making

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module provides the opportunity for participants to understand, use, analyse, and manipulate macroeconomic data for strategic decision-making in the business environment.

Module Content: Specific issues examined include how to present macroeconomic data, how data can be analysed and manipulated for strategic decision-making, the advantages and disadvantages of different methods of analysis and presentation of data, and an evaluation of growth models used in the real world.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop confidence in interpreting and explaining macroeconomic data
· Identify and discuss trends and cyclical variations in macroeconomic variables
· Collect, analyse and present key relevant macroeconomic data that underpin decisions made by firms
· Discuss and critically evaluate the methods used by government agencies, banks and economic think-tanks to model the macroeconomy.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 Assignments, 50 Marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6625 Financial Economics and Business Strategy

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module examines the links between financial markets and business strategy where the former is an important consideration in the latter. The objective is to introduce techniques relevant for analysing business performance and formulating business strategies. Tax and cost of capital and its relationship to the capital structure of the firm are also examined.

Module Content: Techniques are employed which enable firms to choose efficiently between alternative investment opportunities and to properly evaluate investment risk.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· apply techniques of investment appraisal
· critically discuss key issues around business investment strategy including tax and the cost of capital for a multinational corporation, its relationship with global capital markets and the capital structure of the firm
· evaluate the risks in investment analysis and explain the workings of risk managment derivatives.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Formal Written Examination 60 marks; Continuous Assessment 40 marks (1 Assignment, 40 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Formal Written Examination; Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Winter 2014.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: 1 x 1½ hr(s) paper(s) to be taken in Autumn 2015. Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6626 Corporate Treasury Management

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The aim of this module is to develop participants' skills and knowledge of the principal financial instruments and strategized used by corporate treasury managers within businesses.

Module Content: The focus of this module is on understanding how companies can best manage the enterprise's holdings, with the aim of maximising the firm's liquidity, and mitigating its operational, financial and reputational risk, while enhancing shareholder value. Specific topics will include: the strategic objectives of corporate treasury, evaluating interest rate and foreign exchange rate risk.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· differentiate between the strategic objectives of corporate treasury
· evaluate arguments for and against hedging foreign exchange rate risk and interest rate risk
· evaluate the management of liquidity in a multinational corporation through cash and working capital management, financing foreign trade and corporate risk management employ techniques to efficiently manage a business's cash flows
· employ techniques to efficiently manage a business's cash flows
· identify and quantify interest and exchange rate risk
· explain the workings of risk management derivatives.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (2 Assignments, 50 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6627 Fieldwork Methods for Business

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures (and Workshops).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module aims to develop participants' understanding of a broad range of issues in survey design and data collection. The module also provides participants with the necessary knowledge and analytical skills to design and conduct their own small-scale surveys. A key issue addressed is the potential, limitations and practicalities of business survey research methods

Module Content: The focus of the module is on the application of techniques in survey design to gather economic data on business enterprises. Key topics addressed include research problem formulation, research design, sampling techniques, data collection methods, survey interviewing, and questionnaire design.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Develop frameworks and hypotheses in order to investigate a business research problem
· Demonstrate an understanding different research designs
· Apply the different sampling techniques used in business survey design
· Evaluate survey questionnaires in terms of layout, question sequence and question and response format
· Design small-scale surveys.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 Assignment, 70 marks; 1 Inclass exam, 30 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Failed elements of Continuous Assessment must be repeated as prescribed by the Programme Director.

[Top of page]

EC6628 Analysis of Business Survey Data

Credit Weighting: 5

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures (and Workshops).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Catherine Kavanagh, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: This module aims to develop participants' data analysis skills. The module also provides participants with the knowledge and analytical skills to analyse business data and present the findings of their research.

Module Content: The focus of the module is on the understanding, using and interpreting survey data for business decision-making. Key topics examined include coding and data entry, descriptive statistics, tests of indifferences, tests of association, regression analysis and dummy variables. Participants are also given the opportunity to develop their survey analysis skills through the use of SPSS.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe, analyse and present business and economic data to a professional standard.
· Estimate, evaluate and interpret tests of data significance of relevance to decision-makers.
· Confidently communicate key information to a professional business audience.

Assessment: Total Marks 100: Continuous Assessment 100 marks (1 Assignment, 70 marks; 1 inclass exam, 30 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Failed elements of Continuous Assessment must be repeated as prescribed by the Programme Director.

[Top of page]

EC6665 Quantitative Techniques for Economic Research

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semester 1.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 24 x 2hr(s) Lectures.

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce the techniques and application of basic quantitative methods for economic research and to appreciate the role of formalism in economics.

Module Content: Differential calculus. Using derivatives in economics. Multi-variable functions in economics. Exponential and Logarithmic functions. Constrained and unconstrained optimisation. Differential Equations. The role of formalism in economics.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Analyse and interpret data using appropriate methods.
· Define what is meant by a derivative and explain its application in economics.
· Apply the rules of differentiation to the analysis of economic models, e.g. utility, production, revenue, costs, profits, elasticity, consumption etc.
· Compute solutions to constrained and unconstrained optimisation problems.
· Apply some of the various tools in financial economics for calculating monies received or repaid in the future.
· Evaluate the role of formalism in economics.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (Continuous Assessment 200 Marks. 2 X Inclass examinations, 60 Marks each; 1 X 2,500 word essay, 80 Marks.).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6666 Research Methods and Professional Development

Credit Weighting: 10

Semester(s): Semester 2.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 12 x 2hr(s) Lectures; 12 x 2hr(s) Other (Directed Study).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: The aim of this module is to equip students with the knowledge and skills necessary to carry out and critically evaluate research in economics.

Module Content: Lectures, small group tutorials and supervised practical work on research design, methodology, and practice, topics including: varieties of data collection analysis and interpretation; ethical issues and report writing.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Critically evaluate the literature in a research area.
· Formulate original research questions.
· Design and carry out a preliminary research study using appropriate methodology.
· Appreciate ethical issues and make ethical judgments.
· Communicate research in written and oral presentations
· Evaluate methodologies used in economic research.
· Reflect on and manage their on-going professional development.

Assessment: Total Marks 200: Continuous Assessment 200 marks (Literature Review 100 marks; Data Collection and Analysis Report 100 marks.).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as prescribed by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC6667 Dissertation in Economics

Credit Weighting: 30

Semester(s): Semester 3.

No. of Students:

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): Other (Presentation and Research Supervision).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr John Eakins, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Application of skills, knowledge and techniques acquired in the MEconSc to a research dissertation.

Module Content: 10,000 (maximum) word dissertation on a research topic in economics.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Use economic theory in research
· Apply economic research skills
· Communicate economic research in academic peer-reviewed journal and media outlets.
· Identify publication outlets.

Assessment: Total Marks 600: Continuous Assessment 600 marks (1 x 10,000 Word Dissertation).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Work which is submitted late shall be assigned a mark of zero (or a Fail Judgement in the case of Pass/Fail modules).

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 40%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: No Supplementary Examination.

[Top of page]

EC7003 Research Design and Methods for Practitioner Researchers

Credit Weighting: 15

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2 and 3.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 15.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 8 x 3hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); Directed Study (supervised research); Other (Reflective Journal/Learning Diary).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: Progress the chosen research theme(s); outline and apply appropriate methods to conduct research on the topic(s) identified with the practitioner orientation explicitly identified.

Module Content: Advance the research proposal by selecting a research design and methods appropriate to the research question(s); Make explicit the role and relevance of the practitioner orientation of the research; implement the design and apply the methods to conduct the research, including information/data identification and collection.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Apply appropriate concepts/tools to design and conduct a research study in Business Economics
· Outline methods for integration and contextualisation of the professional experience of the practitioner into the research study
· Keep ongoing track of the research decisions made and the rationale employed in choices made in conducting the research
· Draw conclusions from the research for plans, strategies and policies relevant for the participant's organization context in the medium-to-long-term.

Assessment: Total Marks 300: Continuous Assessment 300 marks (one 4,000 word reflective essay, 200 marks; one individual in-class presentation, 50 marks; one learning diary 50 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 50%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as determined by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC7004 Research Analysis and Evaluation

Credit Weighting: 15

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2 and 3.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 15.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 8 x 3hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); Directed Study (supervised research); Other (Reflective Journal/Learning Diary).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce doctoral students to core issues in research analysis and evaluation in Business Economics and to provide them with practical advice in these areas relevant to their research objectives.

Module Content: Issues in collection and storing of data/information appropriate to the research dissertation. Analysis of the quantitative or qualitative (or both) and mixed data collected. Evaluation of the data in the light of the research questions including focus on measurement reliability and validity.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Identify and collect data relevant to dissertation
· Prepare, input and check data (quantitative or qualitative)
· Integrate data from transcripts/notes, other sources (qualitative)
· Display and describe data using statistics (where appropriate), or matrices, charts, graphs, networks.
· Examine/identify relationships, key themes, patterns, differences, trends in data.

Assessment: Total Marks 300: Continuous Assessment 300 marks (one 4,000 word assignment 200 marks; one learning diary 100 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 50%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as determined by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC7005 Research Presentation, Analysis and Evaluation for Practitioner Researchers

Credit Weighting: 15

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2 and 3.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 15.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 8 x 3hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); Directed Study (supervised research; Presentations of research).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To provide a practice setting for presenting research to colleagues, engaging in analysis and evaluation of research approaches and findings in a collaborative setting, with explicit emphasis on the integration of the practitioner orientation in the research portfolio.

Module Content: Presentations of research in oral, written and electronic formats as the basis for discussion, analysis and evaluation of the research process, outcomes and outputs. Hands-on experience in the application of analytic procedures, including SPSS/STATA, including consideration of the strengths and weaknessess of the procedures. Emphasis is on understanding as well as application and the practitioner perspective is explicitly addressed.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Engage in constructive critique of approach, methods and findings in colleagues' research
· Use analytic techniques appropriately to analyse data/information collected to address research question(s) posed
· Draw inferences from the data analysis in terms of the research question(s)
· Outline how the research has contributed to knowledge in Business Economics, emphasising the practitioner orientation
· Outline the implications of the study for the integration of personal, professional and organisational development.

Assessment: Total Marks 300: Continuous Assessment 300 marks (three individual presentations of research, 60 marks each; 2 assessments of colleagues' research presentation, 60 marks each).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 50%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as determined by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC7006 Developmental Approaches for Practitioner-Researchers

Credit Weighting: 20

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2 and 3.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 15.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 1 x 8hr(s) Seminars (& Workshops); 9 x 3hr(s) Workshops (on Personal-Professional Development); Directed Study (supervised research); Other (Reflective Journal).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To introduce students to methods and typologies of adult learning and professional development appropriate to practitioner-researchers, including that of thinkers such as Robert Kegan.

Module Content: Exploration of
* Role of increasing complexity of thinking required for adult learning/development as outlined, for example, by Robert Kegan
* Meaning-making as it applies to adult learning/development
* Implications (of above) for specific practitioner-researcher fields of inquiry.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Describe the impact of increasing complexity on practitioner learning and development
· Outline how meaning-making applies to practitioner learning and development
· Compare and contrast a technical-rational approach to practice and a meaning-making stance
· Relate and apply the module themes to practitioner experience based on customised assignments.

Assessment: Total Marks 400: Continuous Assessment 400 marks (one 3,000 word reflective essay, 250 marks; one in-class group presentation, 50 marks; one learning diary 100 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 50%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as determined by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]

EC7007 Research Design and Methods in Business Economics

Credit Weighting: 20

Semester(s): Semesters 1 and 2 and 3.

No. of Students: Min 5, Max 15.

Pre-requisite(s): None

Co-requisite(s): None

Teaching Method(s): 1 x 8hr(s) Seminars (Workshops); 9 x 3hr(s) Workshops (on Personal-Professional Development); Directed Study (supervised research); Other ((Reflective Journal, On-Line Discussion forum)).

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Eleanor Doyle, Department of Economics.

Lecturer(s): Staff, Department of Economics.

Module Objective: To lay foundations of sound empirical research in Business Economics and to explore practitioner-oriented research questions in the context of research designs appropriate to their investigation.

Module Content: Examination of how selected researchers have approached the systematic collection and analysis of data appropriate to their selected question of interest. Focusing on generation of hypotheses, case/sample selection, sourcing information/data, measurement issues, role and appropriateness of quantitative and mixed methods, designing and conducting surveys, working with data sets.

Learning Outcomes: On successful completion of this module, students should be able to:
· Define and explain concepts/tools of research including: The scientific method; Action research; Theory and its role; Survey designs and methods; Case Study research: Approaches to data collection; Hypotheses development
· Ethical principles and practices; Quantitative/Qualitative/Mixed analytical designs; Survey, Focus Group & Interview methods.
· Effectively critique and evaluate both the theoretical bases and methods employed in selected research articles and/or reports or business/policy analyses.
· Develop an awareness of research in practice and the different issues to consider over the research phases of identifying and selecting literature, identifying valid hypothesis for testing, conducting empirical research, and the challenges to progressing research to completion.

Assessment: Total Marks 400: Continuous Assessment 400 marks (two 2,000 word essays, 150 marks each; one learning diary 100 marks).

Compulsory Elements: Continuous Assessment.

Penalties (for late submission of Course/Project Work etc.): Where work is submitted up to and including 7 days late, 10% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Where work is submitted up to and including 14 days late, 20% of the total marks available shall be deducted from the mark achieved. Work submitted 15 days late or more shall be assigned a mark of zero.

Pass Standard and any Special Requirements for Passing Module: 50%.

Formal Written Examination: No Formal Written Examination.

Requirements for Supplemental Examination: Marks in passed element(s) of Continuous Assessment are carried forward, Failed element(s) of Continuous Assessment must be repeated (as determined by the Programme Director).

[Top of page]